Olivetti Copier 3501 User Manual

d-Copia 3501 / 3501MF

d-Copia 4501 / 4501MF

Operation Manual

Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to

gain the maximum benefit from the product. Before

installing this product, be sure to read the installation

requirements and cautions sections.

Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference

including this manual, the "Operation manual (for general

information and copier operation)" and operation manuals

for any optional equipment which has been installed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In some areas, the "POWER" switch positions are marked "I" and " " on the copier

instead of "ON" and "OFF".

The symbol " " denotes the copier is not completely de-energized but in a stand-by

condition at this "POWER" switch position.

If your copier is so marked, please read "I" for "ON" and " " for "OFF".

Caution!

For a complete electrical disconnection, pull out the main plug.

The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily

accessible.

➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢

Required in IEC-950 (EN 60 950) - Europe

• The equipment should be installed near an accessible socket outlet for easy disconnection.

Required in Appendix ZB of BS 7002 (En 60 950) — United Kingdom

MAINS PLUG WIRING INSTRUCTIONS

The mains lead of this equipment is already fitted with a mains plug which is either a non-rewireable

(moulded) or a rewireable type. Should the fuse need to be replaced, a BSI or ASTA approved fuse

to BS1362 marked

be used.

and of the same rating as the one removed from the plug must

Always refit the fuse cover after replacing the fuse on the moulded plug. Never use the plug without

the fuse cover fitted.

In the unlikely event of the socket outlet in your home not being compatible with the plug supplied

either cut-off the moulded plug (if this type is fitted) or remove by undoing the screws if a rewireable

plug is fitted and fit an appropriate type observing the wiring code below.

DANGER: The fuse should be removed from the cut-off plug and the plug destroyed immediately

and disposed of in a safe manner. Under no circumstances should the cut-off plug be inserted

elsewhere into a 13A socket outlet as a serious electric shock may occur.

To fit an appropriate plug to the mains lead, follow the instructions below:

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

GREEN-AND-YELLOW: Earth

BLUE:

BROWN:

Neutral

Live

As the colours of the wires in this mains lead may not correspond with coloured markings

identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug

which is marked with the letter E, or by the safety earth symbol Å@, or coloured green or green-

and-yellow.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter

N or coloured black.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the

letter L or coloured red.

If you have any doubt, consult a qualified electrician.

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.

➣

➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢

➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣

Warning:

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in

which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Warranty

While every effort has been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible, Olivetti S.p.A. makes

no warranty of any kind with regard to its content. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. Olivetti

is not responsible for any loss or damages, direct or indirect, arising from or related to the use of this operation manual.

written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under copyright laws.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIRECTIVE 2002/96/CE ON THE TREATMENT, COLLECTION, RECYCLING AND

DISPOSAL OF ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND THEIR COMPONENTS

INFORMATION

1. FOR COUNTRIES IN THE EUROPEAN UNION (EU)

The disposal of electric and electronic devices as solid urban waste is strictly prohibited: it must be collected separately.

The dumping of these devices at unequipped and unauthorized places may have hazardous effects on health and the

environment.

Offenders will be subjected to the penalties and measures laid down by the law.

TO DISPOSE OF OUR DEVICES CORRECTLY:

a) Contact the Local Authorities, who will give you the practical information you need and the instructions for handling the

waste correctly, for example: location and times of the waste collection centres, etc.

b) When you purchase a new device of ours, give a used device similar to the one purchased to our dealer for disposal.

The crossed dustbin symbol on the device means that:

- when it to be disposed of, the device is to be taken to the equipped waste collection centres and is to be

handled separately from urban waste;

- The producer guarantees the activation of the treatment, collection, recycling and disposal procedures in

accordance with Directive 2002/96/CE (and subsequent amendments).

2. FOR OTHER COUNTRIES (NOT IN THE EU)

The treatment, collection, recycling and disposal of electric and electronic devices will be carried out in accordance with the

laws in force in the country in question.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part 1: General Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTES

● Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the

manual, please contact your nearest Olivetti Service Department.

● This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect

or other problem is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest Olivetti Service Department.

● Aside from instances provided for by law, Olivetti is not responsible for failures occurring during use of the

product or its options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for

any damage that occurs due to use of the product.

The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine

due to product improvements and modifications.

PRODUCT CONFIGURATIONS

The table below shows the product models covered by this manual.

(As of March 2006)

Model

Product configuration

Laser printer

Olivetti d-Copia 3501/d-Copia 3501MF

Olivetti d-Copia 4501/d-Copia 4501MF

Laser printer

OPERATION MANUALS

The following operation manuals are provided for the machine. Please read the appropriate manuals as needed for

the features you wish to learn about.

● Operation manual (for general information and copier operation) (this manual):

The first half of this manual provides general information about the machine, including safety information, loading

paper, removing misfeeds, and regular maintenance.

The second half of the manual explains how to use the copy and document filing functions.

● Key operator's guide:

This primarily explains key operator programs for machine management and copier related functions. Key

operator programs for the fax, printer and network scanner functions are explained in the manuals for those

functions.

Key operator programs are used by key operators to configure function settings to meet the needs of the

customer.

● Operation manual (for facsimile)

This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a facsimile. To use the fax function, the facsimile

expansion kit must be installed.

● Software setup guide (for printer)

This explains how to connect the machine to your computer, install the printer driver for Windows, and configure

the printer driver settings.

● Operation manual (for printer)*

This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer.

● Operation manual (for network scanner)*

This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a network scanner when connected to a computer.

To use the network scanner function, the NS3 network scanner expansion kit must be installed.

* The operation manual (for printer) and the operation manual (for network scanner) are provided as PDF files in

the CD-ROM.

This manual is not provided as printed manual.

0-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the

machine is moved.

1.The machine should be installed near an

accessible power outlet for easy connection.

2.Be sure to connect the power cord only to a

power outlet that meets the specified voltage and

current requirements. Also make certain the

outlet is properly grounded.

ꢀFor the power supply requirements, see the

name plate on the back of the main unit.

3.Do not install your machine in areas that are:

ꢀdamp, humid, or very dusty

ꢀexposed to direct sunlight

ꢀpoorly ventilated

ꢀsubject to extreme temperature or humidity

changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or

heater.

4.Be sure to allow the required space around the

machine for servicing and proper ventilation.

30cm (11-13/16")

80cm

(31-1/2")

60cm

(23-5/8")

60cm (23-5/8")

A small amount of ozone is produced within the machine during operation. The emission level is insufficient to

cause any health hazard.

NOTE:

The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m ) calculated as an 8 hr. time-

weighted average concentration.

However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it is advisable to place the copier

in a ventilated area.

0-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAUTIONS

1.Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches or smudges on the

drum will cause dirty prints.

2.The fusing unit is extremely hot. Exercise care in this area.

3.Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your

eyes.

Fusing unit

4.Five adjusters are provided on all optional stand/paper drawer units.

These adjusters should be lowered until they contact the floor.

When moving the machine with the optional stand/paper drawer, be

sure to raise the adjusters. Also, unlock the two casters at the front of

the optional stand/paper drawer. After moving the machine, lower the

four adjusters until they reach the floor and lock the two casters.

5.Do not make any modifications to this machine. Doing so may result in

personal injury or damage to the machine.

6.Since this machine is heavy, it is recommended that it be moved by

more than one person to prevent injury.

Adjuster

7.When connecting this machine to a computer, be sure to first turn both

the computer and the machine off.

Lock

Release

8.Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law.

The following items are normally prohibited from printing by national

law. Other items may be prohibited by local law.

●

Money

Stamps

Bonds

Stocks

●

Bank drafts Checks

Passports

Driver's licences

The part indicated in the illustration is only to be handled by a service technician.

Absolutely do not touch this part.

Some models include the document filling function, which stores document image on the machine's hard disk.

Stored documents can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed. If a hard disk failure occurs, it will no

longer be possible to call up the stored document data. To prevent the loss of important documents in the unlikely

event of a hard disk failure, keep the originals of important documents or store the original data elsewhere.

With the exception of instances provided for by law, Olivetti S.p.A.: bears no responsibility for any damages

or loss due to the loss of stored document data.

"BATTERY DISPOSAL"

THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED

OF PROPERLY. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL OLIVETTI DEALER OR AUTHORISED SERVICE

REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSISTANCE IN DISPOSING OF THIS BATTERY.

This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury.

Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations.

For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance:

www.eia.org

0-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAUTIONS

Laser Information

Wave length

+10 nm

-15 nm

785 nm

Pulse times

North America:

Europe:

0.2 mW - 0.4 mW

35 cpm model: (4.1 µs ± 4.1 ns)/7 mm

45 cpm model: (5.7 µs ± 5.7 ns)/7 mm

35 cpm model: (3.8 µs ± 3.8 ns)/7 mm

45 cpm model: (4.4 µs ± 4.4 ns)/7 mm

Output power

At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.4 MILLIWATT PLUS 8 % and is maintained

constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC).

Caution

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous

radiation exposure.

For North America:

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standards. This

means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For your safety, observe the precautions below.

ꢀ Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers.

ꢀ The equipment's exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any safety interlock by

inserting wedges or other items into switch slots.

For Europe:

CAUTION

VAROITUS!

LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN

MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ

KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA

MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA

ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN

TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1

YLITTÄVÄLLE

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS

DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE

TO BEAM.

VORSICHT

UNSICHTBARE

LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN

ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND

SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG

ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM

STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE

LASERSÄTEILYLLE.

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT

VARNING

OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ

ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA

BRUKSANVISNING

ADVARSEL

USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING

VED ÅBNING, NÅR

SPECIFICERATS, KAN

SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER

UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ

UDSAETTELSE FOR

ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS FÖR

OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING,

SOM ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN

FÖR LASERKLASS 1.

STRÅLNING.

CLASS 1

LASER PRODUCT

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

CAUTION

UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND

SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERERÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

VORSICHT

ADVARSEL

ADVERSEL

USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER

UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING.

USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES OG SIKKERHEDSLÅS BRYTES.

UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.

OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRRAR ÄR

URKOPPLADE. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.

LASER KLASSE 1

VARNING

VARO!

Laserstrahl

AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ

LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.

0-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONTENTS

PRODUCT CONFIGURATIONS..................................0-1

OPERATION MANUALS..............................................0-1

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS..............................0-2

CAUTIONS...................................................................0-3

ꢀ Laser Information .................................................0-4

CONTENTS .................................................................0-5

Page

CHAPTER 3

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

DUPLEX MODULE.......................................................3-2

ꢀ Part names ...........................................................3-2

ꢀ Specifications .......................................................3-2

ꢀ Loading paper in the bypass tray .........................3-3

ꢀ

Troubleshooting (concerning the duplex module)..3-4

CHAPTER 1

BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT

MAIL-BIN STACKER....................................................3-5

ꢀ Part names ...........................................................3-5

ꢀ Specifications .......................................................3-5

ꢀ Misfeed in the mail-bin stacker.............................3-6

FINISHER.....................................................................3-7

ꢀ Part names ...........................................................3-7

ꢀ Specifications .......................................................3-7

ꢀ Finisher functions .................................................3-8

ꢀ Using the finisher functions ..................................3-9

ꢀ Staple cartridge replacement................................3-10

ꢀ Misfeed in the finisher...........................................3-12

ꢀ Troubleshooting finisher problems .......................3-13

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER .......................................3-14

ꢀ Part names ...........................................................3-14

ꢀ Specifications .......................................................3-14

ꢀ Saddle stitch finisher functions.............................3-15

ꢀ Using the saddle stitch finisher.............................3-18

ꢀ Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam

removal.................................................................3-19

ꢀ Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher......................3-22

ꢀ Troubleshooting (concerning the saddle stitch

finisher).................................................................3-24

INTRODUCTION..........................................................1-2

MAIN FEATURES........................................................1-3

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS ...............................1-9

ꢀ Exterior.................................................................1-9

ꢀ Interior..................................................................1-10

ꢀ Part names and functions of peripheral devices ..1-11

ꢀ Operation panel....................................................1-13

ꢀ Touch panel .........................................................1-14

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF.......................1-17

AUDITING MODE ........................................................1-18

ꢀ Using the machine when the auditing mode is

enabled ................................................................1-18

CHAPTER 2

MANAGING THE MACHINE

LOADING PAPER........................................................2-2

ꢀ Loading paper in paper tray 1 ..............................2-2

ꢀ Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 ..............2-2

ꢀ Specifications of paper trays ................................2-3

ꢀ Setting the paper type and paper size .................2-5

ꢀ Setting the paper size when a special size is

loaded ..................................................................2-6

ꢀ Programming and editing paper types .................2-7

ꢀ Loading paper in the multi purpose drawer..........2-8

ꢀ Specifications (multi purpose drawer) ..................2-10

ꢀ Loading paper in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper

drawer ..................................................................2-10

CHAPTER 4

MAKING COPIES

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER...........................4-2

ꢀ Acceptable originals .............................................4-2

PLACING ORIGINALS .................................................4-3

CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL ......4-5

ꢀ Manually setting the scanning size.......................4-5

STORING, DELETING, AND USING ORIGINAL

ꢀ Specifications (stand/3

500 sheet paper

SIZES ...........................................................................4-6

ꢀ Storing or deleting an original size .......................4-6

NORMAL COPYING.....................................................4-7

ꢀ Making copies with the automatic document

feeder ...................................................................4-7

ꢀ Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic

document feeder...................................................4-10

ꢀ Copying from the document glass........................4-11

ꢀ Automatic two-sided copying from the document

glass .....................................................................4-13

ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE....................................4-14

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM........................4-15

ꢀ Automatic selection (auto image) .........................4-15

ꢀ Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom).........4-16

ꢀ XY ZOOM.............................................................4-18

SPECIAL PAPERS.......................................................4-20

drawer).................................................................2-10

ꢀ Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet

paper drawer........................................................2-11

ꢀ Specifications (stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper

drawer).................................................................2-11

CUSTOM SETTINGS...................................................2-13

ꢀ General procedure for custom settings ................2-13

ꢀ About the settings ................................................2-15

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE ....................2-16

STORAGE OF SUPPLIES...........................................2-17

MISFEED REMOVAL...................................................2-18

ꢀ Misfeed removal guidance ...................................2-18

ꢀ Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and

exit area ...............................................................2-19

ꢀ Misfeed in the duplex module ..............................2-20

ꢀ Misfeed in the paper feed area ............................2-21

REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED ........................2-23

ꢀ Removing a misfed original from the automatic

document feeder ..................................................2-23

TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................2-24

0-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 5

CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS

CHAPTER 8

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIAL MODES ........................................................5-2

ꢀ General procedure for using special functions .....5-2

ꢀ Margin shift...........................................................5-3

ꢀ Erase ....................................................................5-4

ꢀ Dual page copy.....................................................5-5

ꢀ Pamphlet copy......................................................5-6

ꢀ Job build ...............................................................5-8

ꢀ Tandem copy........................................................5-9

ꢀ Covers/inserts.......................................................5-11

ꢀ Transparency film with insert sheets ....................5-22

ꢀ Multi shot ..............................................................5-23

ꢀ Book copy.............................................................5-25

ꢀ Card shot ................................................................. 5-26

ꢀ Mirror image .........................................................5-28

ꢀ B/W reverse..........................................................5-28

ꢀ Print menu ............................................................5-29

SPECIFICATIONS....................................................... 8-2

LIST OF COMBINATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES.. 8-4

INDEX.......................................................................... 8-5

STORING,

USING

AND

DELETING

JOB

PROGRAMS ................................................................5-41

ꢀ Storing a job program...........................................5-41

ꢀ Calling up a job program ......................................5-42

ꢀ Deleting a stored job program ..............................5-42

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN...................................5-43

CHAPTER 6

MACHINE MAINTENANCE (FOR

COPYING)

USER MAINTENANCE ................................................6-2

ꢀ Cleaning the document glass and the automatic

document feeder...................................................6-2

ꢀ Cleaning

the

main

charger

the

photoconductive drum ..........................................6-2

TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................6-3

CHAPTER 7

DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION

OVERVIEW..................................................................7-2

ꢀ Document filing function .......................................7-2

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION..........7-4

ꢀ A look at the operation panel................................7-4

ꢀ Saving files ...........................................................7-4

ꢀ Main screen of document filing.............................7-5

ꢀ Document filing icons ...........................................7-5

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE..........................7-6

ꢀ Quick File..............................................................7-6

ꢀ Filing.....................................................................7-7

ꢀ Print jobs...............................................................7-9

ꢀ Scan Save ............................................................7-10

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE...............................7-13

ꢀ Searching for and calling up a saved file.............. 7-13

ꢀ Calling up and using a saved file..........................7-15

CUSTOM SETTINGS...................................................7-21

ꢀ Creating, editing, and deleting user names and

folders...................................................................7-21

ENTERING CHARACTERS .........................................7-26

TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................7-28

0-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER 1

BEFORE USING THE

PRODUCT

This chapter contains basic information that should be read before using

the product.

Page

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................... 1-2

MAIN FEATURES................................................................................... 1-3

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS .......................................................... 1-9

ꢀ

Exterior............................................................................................ 1-9

ꢀ

Interior............................................................................................. 1-10

ꢀ

Part names and functions of peripheral devices ............................. 1-11

ꢀ

Operation panel............................................................................... 1-13

ꢀ

Touch panel .................................................................................... 1-14

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF.................................................. 1-17

AUDITING MODE................................................................................... 1-18

ꢀ

Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled.................. 1-18

1-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing a Olivetti digital multifunction copier.

Please read this manual before using the machine. In particular, be sure to read "INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS"

before using the machine.

Please keep this manual close at hand for reference whenever necessary.

This manual provides general information on using the machine, such as routine maintenance and how to load paper

and remove misfeeds. It also explains how to use the copier and document filing functions.

Separate manuals have been provided for the fax function, printer function, and network scanner function.

ꢁ Original and paper sizes

This machine allows use of standard sizes in both the AB and inch systems.

These are shown in the tables below.

Sizes in the AB system

Sizes in the inch system

11" x 17" (LEDGER)

8-1/2" x 14" (LEGAL)

8-1/2" x 13" (FOOLSCAP)

8-1/2" x 11" (LETTER)

7-1/4" x 10-1/2" (EXECUTIVE)

5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (INVOICE)

ꢁ The meaning of "R" in original and paper size indications

Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the portrait or landscape orientations. To differentiate

between landscape and portrait, the landscape orientation size indication will contain an "R". These are indicated

as A4R, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, etc. Sizes that can be placed only in the landscape orientation (A3,

B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13") do not contain the "R" in their size indication.

Landscape

orientation

Size indication

without "R"

Size indication

with "R"

Portrait orientation

1-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIN FEATURES

The digital multifunction copier is capable of performing a variety of functions. This page shows features related to

the copy function.

● Sort mode

● Group mode

● 2-sided Copy

See page 1-3

● Job programs

● Mirror Image

● B/W Reverse

See page 1-6

(When the duplex module is installed.)

● Date

● Stamp

● Page numbering

See page 1-6

● Exposure Adjustments

See page 1-3

See page 1-4

● Reduction/Enlargement

See page 1-7

● XY Zoom

● Margin Shift

● Erase

● Dual Page Copy

● Pamphlet Copy

See page 1-4

● Text

● Interrupting a copy run

● Offset mode See page 1-7

(When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)

● Staple sort mode See page 1-7

(When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)

● Saddle stitch See page 1-7

(When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)

● Hole punching See page 1-8

See page 1-7

See page 1-4

See page 1-5

● Job Build

● Tandem Copy

See page 1-5

(Olivetti d-Copia 3501 / d-Copia 4501 version

or when the document filling function has been added.)

● Covers/inserts

● Transparency Insert

● Multi Shot

● Book Copy

● Card Shot

See page 1-5

See page 1-6

(When the Saddle stitch finisher and Punch

Module are installed.)

● Document filing function

See page 1-8

(Olivetti d-Copia 3501/4501 version or when the

document filling function has been added.)

Sort mode

See page 4-9

2-sided Copy

See pages 4-10, 4-13

Copies can be collated.

Copy onto both sides of the paper using the document

glass or the automatic document feeder.

Copy

Original

Copy

* When the duplex module is installed.

Group mode

See page 4-9

Exposure Adjustments

See page 4-14

Copies can be grouped by page.

The desired image type for the original can be

selected.

Text

Text/Photo

Photo

Original

Copy

Resolution

Exposure

ABCDE

Lighter

Darker

1-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIN FEATURES

Reduction / Enlargement

See page 4-15

Erase

See page 5-4

Copies can be enlarged or reduced to the desired

size.

Shadows that appear around the edges of copies of

books or thick originals can be erased.

Original

Copy

Original

Copy

Edge erase

Centre erase

Enlargement

Reduction

Edge+Centre

erase

XY Zoom

See page 4-18

Dual Page Copy

See page 5-5

Separate ratio settings can be selected for the

length and width of a copy.

The left and right pages of a book can be

successively copied onto separate sheets.

Original

Copy

Book original

Copy

Margin Shift

Margins can be added to copies.

See page 5-3

Pamphlet Copy

See page 5-6

One-sided or two-sided pamphlet style copies can

be made.

One-sided copying Image shifted Image shifted

Original

to the right

to the left

Originals (one-sided)

Finished copies are

folded in two.

Left binding

Margin

Two-sided copying

Original

Margin

First page

Originals (two-sided)

Image shifted

to the right

Image shifted

to the left

Right binding

First page

Margin

1-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIN FEATURES

See page 5-22

Job Build

See page 5-8

Transparency Insert

When you have a very large number of originals, the

pages can be scanned in sets.

Inserts can be automatically inserted between

transparencies.

Originals (1-sided)

Copy

Originals (2-sided)

Insert sheets

100 sheets

50 sheets

Tandem Copy

See page 5-9

Multi Shot

See page 5-23

Two machines can be used to run a large copy job

in parallel.

Multiple original pages can be copied onto a

single sheet of paper in a uniform layout.

Originals

(1-sided)

Originals

(2-sided)

Copy

100 sets of

copies

50 sets of

copies

50 sets of

copies

* Olivetti d-Copia 3501 / 4501 version or when

the document filling function has been added.

Covers/inserts

See page 5-11

Book Copy

See page 5-25

Front covers, back covers, and inserts can be

added. These can also be copied on.

Books and other bound originals can be copied

pamphlet style.

Original

Copy

Originals

Left binding

Back cover

First page

Front cover

Insert sheets

Right binding

1-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIN FEATURES

Card Shot

See page 5-26

B/W Reverse

See page 5-28

The front and back of a card can be copied onto

one sheet of paper.

White and black can be inverted on a copy to

produce a negative image.

This function is convenient for making copies for

certification purposes and helps save paper.

Original

Copy

Original

Copy

CARD

Front of

card

CARD

Back of

card

Example:

Portrait

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size

Example:

Landscape

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size

Job programs

See page 5-41

Date

See page 5-32

Various steps of a copy operation can be stored

as a program, and up to 10 programs can be

stored. Saving frequently used sets of settings in a

program saves you the trouble of selecting those

settings each time you wish to use them.

The date can be added to copies.

JOB PROGRAMS

PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.

2004/OCT/1

RECALL

Mirror Image

See page 5-28

Stamp

See page 5-33

A mirror image copy can be made.

Reverse text can be added to copies ("stamp").

Original

Copy

CONFIDENTIAL

1-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIN FEATURES

See page 3-8

Page numbering

See page 5-34

Offset mode

Page numbers can be added to copies.

Each set of output can be offset slightly from other

sets for easy separation.

Offset mode

Non-Offset mode

*When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is

installed.

Text

See page 5-38

Staple sort mode

See page 3-8, 3-16

Entered text can be added to copies.

Sets of copies can be automatically stapled.

Original

Copy

October, 2004 Meeting

*When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is

installed.

Interrupting a copy run

See page 5-43

Saddle stitch

See page 3-14

A copy job in progress can be interrupted for a

rush job.

When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies

can be automatically folded in half and stapled at

the fold. (Use with the pamphlet function (see

page 5-6) or book copy function (see page 5-25).)

Saddle stitch binding

INTERRUPT

AUTO

ORIGINAL

ORIGINA

AUTO

EXPOSUR

AUTO

*When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.

1-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIN FEATURES

Hole punching

See page 3-17

Document filing function See CHAPTER 7

Copies can be punched to add holes.

A document image can be stored on the hard disk.

A stored file can easily be called up and printed or

transmitted.

Original

Punch positions

Printed

Document

Image

HDD

Transmitted

Save to

machine's

hard disk

Call up a

saved file to

reuse

* Olivetti d-Copia 3501 / 4501 version or when

the document filling function has been added.

* When the saddle stitch finisher and punch

module are installed.

ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark.

The ENERGY STAR program is an energy reduction plan introduced by theUnited States Environmental Protection

Agency in response to environmental issues and for the purpose of advancing the development and utilization of

more energy efficient office equipment.

Energy saving features

This product has the following two power reducing modes to help conserve natural resources and reduce

environmental pollution.

Preheat mode

When the machine remains in the standby state for the amount of time set in the key operator programs, preheat

mode automatically reduces the temperature of the fusing unit to save power while the machine is on standby.

When a fax or print job is received, or keys are pressed on the operation panel, or an original is placed for

a copy, fax, or network scanner job, preheat mode automatically turns off.

Auto power shut-off mode

The auto power shut-off mode is the second level of power reduction. In this mode power is shut off to the

fusing unit and the touch panel. In this state more energy is saved than in the preheat mode but the time to

recover to the ready condition will be longer. The preset time to enter this mode can be set by a key operator

program.

When this product is used as a printer, and either of the above modes is active, the mode will be deactivated

automatically by an incoming job and the machine will automatically warm up and start to print when it has

reached the ready temperature.

When this product is configured for multi-function operation, and either of the above modes is active, the mode

will be deactivated as above by an incoming print job. Either mode will also be deactivated by operation of

DOCUMENT FILING, IMAGE SEND or COPY mode key.

1-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Exterior

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) (10)

(12)

(11)

(13)

(1) Bypass tray*

(2) Exit tray*

(7) Operation panel

(8) Front cover

Open to add toner.

(3) Automatic document feeder (See page 4-2.)

(9) Power switch

This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet

originals. Both sides of two-sided originals can be

scanned at once.

Press to turn power on and off.

(10)Paper tray 1

(4) Duplex module*

Module for two-sided printing

(11) Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer*

(5) Upper paper output area (Centre tray)

(12) Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer* (See

page 2-11.)

Finished sheets are deposited here.

(6) Upper exit tray extension*

(13) Multi purpose drawer* (See page 2-8.)

Provides support for large size paper.

(1), (2), (4),

(11), (12) and (13) are peripheral devices. For description of these devices, see page 1-11.

1-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Interior

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(

14)Duplex module side cover

(

17)Toner cartridge (drum/toner cartridge)

Open when a misfeed has occurred in the duplex

module.

The toner cartridge must be replaced when

indicated on the operation panel. (See page 2-15)

15)Side cover latch

18)Photoconductive drum

Push up to open the side cover when a misfeed

has occurred in the main unit.

Images are formed on the photoconductive drum.

NOTE

16)Fusing unit

Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum.

Lift up to open the side cover when a misfeed has

occurred in the main unit.

(

19)Cartridge lock lever

When replacing the drum, toner or developer

cartridge, turn down this lever and pull it out.

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing misfed

paper.

1-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Part names and functions of peripheral devices

(1)

(2)

(10)

(9)

(8)

(3)

(7)

(4)

(6)

(5)

(1) Upper exit tray extension (AR-TE4)

(5) Multi purpose drawer (ARMU2)

Mount this unit to the upper paper exit tray. This

extension is needed to support large size paper.

Up to 500 sheets of 80 g/m (20 lbs.) paper can be

loaded. Also special papers such as envelopes

(standard sizes only) and postcards can be set.

(2) Finisher (AR-FN6)

(6) Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer (AR-D27)

Output sheets can either be sorted in page order

or grouped by page. Sorted sets or groups are

offset stacked for easy separation when removed.

Sorted sets can be delivered either stapled or

unstapled.

This paper feed unit contains an upper multi-

purpose drawer (see item (6)) and two lower

drawers each of which can hold a maximum of

500 sheets of 80 g/m (20 lbs.) paper.

(7) Saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7)

The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place

two staples for centreline binding of paper and

fold them along the centreline.

An optional punch module is available for

installation into the finisher.

(3) Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1)

This unit is an output sorter that has seven

receiving bins.

(8) Duplex module (AR-DU3)

The bin to receive printed output can be selected

in the printer driver. Each bin can be assigned to

receive printed output by an individual person or

by groups of people so that their prints are

separated from other users making them easy to

retrieve.

When this unit is installed, any copies or facsimile

prints will be sent to the top tray and not into the

mail bins.

An optional duplex module must be installed for

automatic two-sided printing.

(9)Duplex module/bypass tray (AR-DU4)

This module is basically the same as (9) above

with the addition of a manual bypass paper feed

unit.

(10)Exit tray (AR-TE3)

Mounted to the paper output port of a duplex

module.

(4) Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer (AR-D28)

This paper feed unit contains an upper multi-

purpose drawer (see item (6)) and a lower drawer

which can hold a maximum of 2000 sheets of 80

g/m (20 lbs.) paper.

1-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

■ Other optional equipment

●Printer server card (AR-NC7)

●PS3 expansion kit (AR-PK6)

This kit provides compatibility of PostScript level 3

to the printer.

This is an NIC card (Network Interface Card) that is

required to use the network printer and network

scanner functions.

●Facsimile expansion kit (AR-FX12)

This kit is required to add fax function.

●Printer server card (AR-NC8)

This is an NIC card (Network Interface Card) that is

required to use the network printer and document

filling functions, and the network scanner function.

Additional fax memory (8MB) (AR-MM9)

●Network scanner expansion kit (AR-EF3)

This kit is required to add the network scanning

feature.

●Barcode font kit (AR-PF1)

This kit adds bar code fonts to the machine.

The network printer function is required to add on

the network scanner function. On models that do

not have the network printer function as a standard

feature, the printer server card is required.

Data security kit ( AR-FR21U, AR-FR22U)

The AR-FR21U is for models that

have a hard disk drive, and the and AR-FR22U

is for models without a hard disk drive.

This kit is used to erase electronic data from the

hard disk and memory immediately after a

document is printed or transmitted.

Some peripheral devices cannot be installed together while others may require the installation of one or more others

to be functional. See page 8-4, "LIST OF COMBINATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES".

Peripheral devices are basically optional, but some are provided as standard equipment for some models.

1-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Operation panel

(1)

(2)

(3)

When the document filing function

has not been added.

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) (8)

(9) (10)

(11)

(1) Touch panel

(4) [JOB STATUS] key

The machine status, messages and touch keys are

Press to display the current job status. (See page

1-15.)

(5) [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key

displayed on the panel. The document filing* ,

copy, network scanner* , and fax* functions are

used by switching to the screen for the desired

function. See the following page.

This is used to store, edit, and delete user names

and folder names for the document filing function* ,

and to configure the key operator programs and

printer configuration settings. (See page 7-21)

(2) Mode select keys and indicators

Use to change modes and the corresponding

display on the touch panel.

(6) Numeric keys

[DOCUMENT FILING] key

Use to enter numeric values for various settings.

Press to select the document filing mode* . (See

page 7-5.)

(7) [ ] key ([ACC.#-C] key)

This key is used in copy mode, document filing

mode* , network scanner mode* , and fax mode* .

When the document filing function has not been

added, this key is the [PRINT] key. This key is

pressed to change to the print mode screen when

the printer function has been added.

(8) [#/P] key

This is used as a program key when using the copy

[IMAGE SEND] key/LINE indicator/DATA

indicator

function, and to dial when using the fax function* .

Press to change the display to network scanner

(9) [C] key (Clear key)

mode* or fax mode* . (See the "Operation manual

(for network scanner)") and "Operation manual (for

facsimile)".)

This key is used in copy mode, document filing

mode , network scanner mode* , and fax mode* .

(10) [START] key

[COPY] key

Use this key to start copying in copy mode, scan a

Press to select the copy mode.

document in network scanner mode* , or scan a

(3) PRINT mode indicators

READY indicator

document for transmission in fax mode* .

(11) [CA] key (Clear all key)

Print data can be received when this indicator is

lit.

This key is used in copy mode, document filing

mode , network scanner mode* , and fax mode* .

DATA indicator

Use the key to cancel settings and perform an

operation from the initial machine state.

Lights up or blinks when print data is being

received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is

being performed.

*1 When the document filing function has been added.

*2 When the network scanner option is installed.

*3 When the fax option is installed.

1-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Touch panel

The touch panel screens shown in this manual are

printed images, and may appear different from the

actual screens.

ꢁ Selecting a function

[Example 1]

If a key is highlighted in a

PER.

setting screen at the

time the screen appears,

the [OK] key can be

pressed to store the

selection without further

operation.

ꢁ Using the touch panel

[Example 1]

CANCEL

LEFT

RIGHT

BINDING

Items on the touch panel

COVER

SETTING

JOB QUEUE

COPY

SETS / PROG

003 / 000

are easily selectable by

touching the key associ-

ated with the item with a

finger. Selection of an

Suzuki

003 / 000

010 / 000

0666211221

item

will

Beep

tone

accompanied with

beep tone* to confirm

the item was selected.

[Example 2]

A function in the special

functions

screen

DUAL PAGE

COPY

Also, the key area for the item will be highlighted

for visual confirmation.

selected by touching the

key so that it is

highlighted. To cancel

the selection, touch the

highlighted key once

again.

TANDEM

COPY

* If a greyed out key is touched, double beeps will

sound.

[Example 2]

Keys which are greyed

out on any screen are

not selectable.

1/13

Copier feature

COMPLETE

ꢀ Dual page copy

ꢀ Job build

ꢀ Tandem copy

ꢀ Mirror image

ꢀ B/W Reverse

[Example 3]

The confirmation beeps can be disabled by a key

operator program. (See page 10 of the key

operator's guide.)

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

corresponding icon

representing the feature

will appear on the touch

panel and on the main

screen of the mode

selected. If this icon is

touched, the setting

screen of the function (or

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

FILE

QUICK FILE

menu screen) will

appear, allowing the settings to be checked or

adjusted and the function to be cancelled easily.

1-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

■ Job status screen (common to print, copy, fax, network scan and Internet fax)

This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.

This screen can be used to display the "JOB QUEUE" (showing stored jobs and the current job) or the

"COMPLETE" job list (showing finished jobs). This screen can be used to check jobs, interrupt a job in progress

to perform another job, and cancel a job.

(1)

(2)

"COMPLETE"

job screen

"JOB QUEUE" screen

JOB QUEUE

COMPLETE

JOB QUEUE

COMPLETE

JOB QUEUE

COPY

SETS / PROGRESS

020 / 001

STATUS

1/1

COPYING

PAPER EMPTY

COPY

020 / 000

002 / 000

DETAIL

PRIORITY

DETAIL

Suzuki

066211221

WAITING

STOP/DELETE

CALL

INTERNET-FAX

FAX JOB

E-MAIL/FTP

PRINT JOB

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) (9)(10)

(11)

(1) Job list

*1 "PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display

When a job status display indicates "PAPER

EMPTY", the specified paper size for the job is not

loaded in any of the trays.

The displayed jobs in the job list are themselves

operation keys. To cancel printing or to give a job

the highest print priority, touch the relevant job key

to select the job and execute the desired operation

using the keys described in (8) and (9).

This shows the current job and the jobs waiting to

be run. The icons to the left of the jobs in the

queue show the job mode. The document filing

reprint job icon is highlighted.

In this case, the job will be suspended until the

required paper is loaded. Other stored jobs will be

printed (if possible) until the required paper is loaded.

(Other jobs will not be printed if the paper runs out

during printing.) If you need to change the paper size

because the specified paper size is not available,

touch the current job key to select it and then touch

the [DETAIL] key described in (10).

Note that the icon does not become highlighted

during retransmission of a fax/image transmission

job.

(2) Mode select key

Print mode

Copy mode

This switches the job list display between "JOB

QUEUE" and "COMPLETE".

E-MAIL/FTP mode

"JOB QUEUE": Shows stored jobs and the job in

progress.

"COMPLETE": Shows finished jobs.

Scan to e-mail job

Scan to FTP job

Scan to Desktop job

Files saved using the "FILE"

and "QUICK

FILE"

functions and finished broadcast

Fax mode

transmission jobs appear as keys in the finished

job screen. The "FILE"

or "QUICK FILE"

job

Fax send job

Fax reception job

keys in the finished job screen can be touched,

followed by the [CALL] key

, to call up a finished

PC-Fax send job

job and print or transmit it. A finished broadcast

transmission job key can be touched followed by

the [DETAIL] key to check the result of the

Internet Fax mode

i-Fax send job

i-Fax reception job

transmission.

Can only be used on the d-Copia 3501/4501

version, or when the document filling function

has been added.

PC-Internet Fax send job

1-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

(3) [PRINT JOB] key

(9) [PRIORITY] key

This displays the print job list of print mode

(copying, printing, fax reception, Internet fax

reception, and self printing).

Touch this key after selecting a stored job in this

[JOB QUEUE] list to print the job ahead of the

other jobs.

Note that a job in progress cannot be interrupted if

it is an interrupt copy job or if it is a list print job.

(4) [E-MAIL/FTP] key

This displays the transmission status and finished

jobs of scan mode (Scan to e-mail, Scan to FTP,

and Scan to Desktop) when the network scanner

option is installed.

(10) [DETAIL] key

This shows detailed information on the selected

job. Files saved using the "FILE"

and "QUICK

FILE"

functions and finished broadcast

(5) [FAX JOB] key

transmission jobs appear as keys in the finished

job screen. A Quick File in the finished job screen

This displays the transmission/reception status

and finished jobs of fax mode (fax and PC-Fax)

when the fax option is installed.

or the [Filing] key* can be touched, followed by the

[CALL] key* , to call up a finished job and print or

(6) Display switching keys

transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission job

key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL] key to

check the result of the transmission.

Use to switch the page of the displayed job list.

(7) [INTERNET-FAX] key

(11) [CALL] key

This displays the transmission/reception status

and finished jobs of Internet fax mode and PC

Internet fax mode when the network scanner

option is installed.

When this key is touched after selecting a job in

the COMPLETE job status screen (a job stored

using the FILE or QUICK FILE keys of the

document filing function), the "JOB SETTINGS"

menu screen appears to let you resend or reprint

the finished job. (See "Document filing function"

on page 7-2.)

(8) [STOP/DELETE] key

Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete

the stored job. Note that printing of received faxes

and received Internet faxes cannot be cancelled

or deleted.

*2 Can only be used on the Olivetti d-Copia 3501 / 4501 version or when the document filling function has been added.

1-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF

Use the power switch on the front of the machine to turn the power on or off.

CAUTION

"ON" position

Before turning off the main power switch, make sure

that the communication and data indicators are not

blinking on the operation panel. Turning off the main

power switch or unplugging the power cord while the

lights are blinking may damage the hard disk and

cause the data being stored or received to be lost.

"OFF" position

Power switch

NOTES

ꢀ Turn both switches off and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm

nearby, or when you are moving the machine.

ꢀ If the fax function has been added, always keep the fax power switch turned on. Faxes cannot be received if the

fax power switch is turned off. (Faxes can be received when the main power switch is turned off.)

1-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUDITING MODE

Auditing mode can be enabled to keep track of the number of pages printed and transmitted (scanned) by each account

(up to 500 accounts can be established). The page counts can be viewed and totaled as needed.

<This mode is enabled in the key operator programs separately for the copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,

document filing functions. (Page 7 of the key operator's guide)>

Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled

The procedure for making copies when auditing mode has been enabled for the copy function is explained below.

NOTES

ꢀ

When auditing mode is enabled for document filing and fax/image transmission, a message will appear asking you

to enter your account number each time you switch to the main screen of one of those functions in the touch panel.

Enter your account number in the same way as for copy mode, and then begin the scanning procedure.

When the account counter is turned on for the printer function, you must enter your account number in the setting screen

of the printer driver on your computer in order to print.

When the auditing mode is turned on, the right

ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT NUMBER.

message appears on the touch panel.

When the above screen appears, enter your 5-digit account number and then begin the copying procedure.

Enter your account number (5 digits) with

the numeric keys.

Follow the appropriate steps to perform

the copy job.

As you enter your

account number, the

hyphens (-) change to

asterisks ( ). If you

enter an incorrect digit,

press the [C] (Clear) key

and re-enter the correct

digit.

When copying is begun, the following message

will appear.

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

PRESS [ACC.#-C] WHEN FINISHED.

To perform an interrupt copy job (page 5-43),

touch the [INTERRUPT] key and then enter your

account number as explained in step 1. The

following message will appear.

When a correct account number is entered, the

following message will appear.

ACCOUNT STATUS :MADE

/REMAINING

COPIES

:00,123,000/00,012,456

COPY INTERRUPT MODE.

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

If a limit has been set by a key operator program for

the number of copies that can be made by the

account, the remaining number that can be made is

displayed.

When the copy job is finished, press the

[ ] key ([ACC.#-C] key)

Check the number in the display and touch the

[OK] key.

NOTE

If "ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY" is enabled in

the key operator programs and an incorrect account

number is entered three times in a row, "PLEASE

SEE YOUR KEY OPERATOR FOR ASSISTANCE."

will appear. (Page 8 of the key operator's guide.)

Operation is not possible while this message

appears (about one minute).

1-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER 2

MANAGING THE MACHINE

This chapter explains how to load paper, replace the toner cartridge, and

remove paper misfeeds. It also contains information about supplies.

Page

LOADING PAPER ................................................................................... 2-2

●

Loading paper in paper tray 1 ......................................................... 2-2

●

Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 ......................................... 2-2

●

Specifications of paper trays........................................................... 2-3

●

Setting the paper type and paper size ............................................ 2-5

●

Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded...................... 2-6

●

Programming and editing paper types ............................................ 2-7

●

Loading paper in the multi purpose drawer..................................... 2-8

●

Specifications (multi purpose drawer)............................................. 2-10

●

Loading paper in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer................. 2-10

●

Specifications (stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer)......................... 2-10

●

Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer ........ 2-11

●

Specifications (stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer)................. 2-11

CUSTOM SETTINGS.............................................................................. 2-12

●

General procedure for custom settings........................................... 2-12

●

About the settings ........................................................................... 2-14

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE................................................ 2-15

STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ...................................................................... 2-16

MISFEED REMOVAL.............................................................................. 2-17

●

Misfeed removal guidance .............................................................. 2-17

●

Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area................ 2-18

●

Misfeed in the duplex module.......................................................... 2-19

●

Misfeed in the paper feed area........................................................ 2-20

REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED ................................................... 2-22

●

Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder .. 2-22

TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................ 2-23

2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOADING PAPER

If the paper runs out during printing, a message will appear in the display.

Follow the procedure below to load paper.

NOTES

ꢀ Do not use curled or folded paper. Doing so may cause a misfeed.

ꢀ For best results use paper supplied by Olivetti. (See page 2-4.)

ꢀ When you change the paper type and size in paper tray 1, set the paper type and size referring to "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (page 2-5).

ꢀ Do not place heavy objects or press hard on any tray which is pulled out.

ꢀ Load paper with the print side face up. However, when the paper type is set to "PRE-PRINTED",

"PRE-PUNCHED" or "LETTER HEAD", load the paper face down*.

* If the two-sided function is disabled using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the key operator programs (page 11

of the key operator's guide), load the paper face up.

Loading paper in paper tray 1

1 ^{Pull out paper tray 1.}

3 ^{Gently push tray 1 into the machine.}

Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

Gently pull the tray out

until it stops.

4 ^{Set the paper type.}

If you change the paper type setting if the paper

type is changed in either paper tray, refer to

"Setting the paper type and paper size" (page 2-5).

Loading paper in paper tray 1 is now

complete.

2 ^{Load paper into the tray.}

Do not load paper above

the maximum height line

(approximately 500

sheets of 80 g/m (20

lbs.) paper).

Changing the paper size in paper tray 1

For paper tray 1, A4, B5 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper can be set. Use the following procedure to change the size as

needed.

1 ^{Pull out paper tray 1.}

4 ^{Gently push tray 1 into the machine.}

Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

If paper remains in the tray, remove it.

5 ^{Set the paper size.}

Adjust the guide plates A and B in the tray

to the length and width of the paper.

Be sure to set the paper size and paper type

referring to "Setting the paper type and paper size"

(page 2-5).

The guide plates A and

B are slidable. Adjust

them to the paper size to

If this is not done, paper misfeeds will occur.

loaded

while

squeezing their lock

levers.

Changing paper size in paper tray 1 is now

complete.

3 ^{Load paper into the tray.}

2-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOADING PAPER

Specifications of paper trays

The specifications for types and sizes of paper that can be used in each tray are shown below.

Tray

Tray No.

Applicable paper types

Applicable paper sizes

Paper

(tray name)

weight

Paper tray 1

Tray 1

Plain paper (Refer to the next page ꢀ A4, B5, 8-1/2

for applicable plain papers.)

x 11

60 to 105 g/m

or 16 to 28 lbs.

Multi purpose

drawer

/bypass tray

Tray 2

Plain paper (Refer to the next page ꢀ If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the 60 to 128 g/m

/bypass for applicable plain papers.)

tray

paper type and paper size (page 2-5), or 16 to 34 lbs.

the following paper sizes can be used

with the automatic detection function:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2 x 13"

If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the

paper type and paper size (page 2-5),

the following paper sizes can be used

with the automatic detection function:

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"

x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R

Non-standard sizes

ꢀ

Special paper ꢀ Thick paper

If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the See

the

(Refer to the ꢀ Labels,

paper type and paper size (page 2-5), the remarks for

following paper sizes can be used with special

next page for

applicable

special

transparency film

the automatic detection function:

A4, A4R, B5, B5R

paper on the

next page.

papers.)

ꢀ

If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the

paper type and paper size (page 2-5), the

following paper sizes can be used with

the automatic detection function:

8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R

ꢀ

Non-standard sizes

Postcard

Japanese official postcard

Envelopes can only ꢀ Applicable standard size envelopes:

be fed from the

multi-purpose drawer.

COM-10, Monarch, DL, C5, ISO B5

CHOKEI 3

Applicable

stock ꢀ Non-standard size

weight for envelopes

is 75 to 90 g/m or 20

to 23 lbs.

Stand

/3 x500 sheet

paper drawer

Upper Tray 2

Same as multi purpose drawer

Plain paper (Refer to the next page ꢀ If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the 60 to 105g/m

Middle Tray 3

for applicable plain papers.)

paper type and paper size (page 2-5), or 16 to 28 lbs.

the following paper sizes can be used

with the automatic detection function:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 13"

If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the

paper type and paper size (page 2-5),

the following paper sizes can be used

with the automatic detection function:

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"

x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R

ꢀ

Lower Tray 4

Stand

Upper Tray 2

Lower Tray 3

Same as multi purpose drawer

/MPD & 2000

sheet paper

drawer

Plain paper (Refer to the next page ꢀ A4, 8-1/2" x 11"

for applicable plain papers.)

60 to 105g/m

or 16 to 28 lbs.

2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOADING PAPER

ꢁ Applicable plain paper

For satisfactory results, plain paper must conform to the following requirements.

Paper in AB system

A5 to A3

Paper in inch system

5-1/2 x 8-1/2 to 11 x17"

Plain paper

60 to 105 g/m or 16 to 28 lbs.

Recycled, coloured, pre-punched, pre-printed and letterhead papers must conform to the same conditions as above.

ꢁ Applicable special paper

For satisfactory results, special paper must conform to the following requirements.

Type

Remarks

Special paper

Thick paper

ꢀ

For A5 to A4 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 8-1/2" x 11" sizes, thick paper ranging

from 60 to 128 g/m or 16 to 34 lbs. can be used.

For sizes larger than A4 or 8-1/2

105 g/m or 16 to 28 lbs. can be used.

x 11

, thick paper ranging from 60 to

Other thick papers Index stock (176 g/m or 65 lbs.) can be used.

Cover stock (200 to 205 g/m or 110 lbs.) can be used but only for A4,

8-1/2" x 11" paper in the portrait orientation.

ꢀ

For A5 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper, the orientation must be landscape.

Transparency film, labels,

and tracing paper

Use Olivettirecommended paper. Do not use labels other than Olivetti

recommended labels. Doing so may leave adhesive residue in the

machine, causing paper misfeeds, smudges on prints or other machine

trouble.

Postcards

Envelopes

ꢀ

Japanese official postcards can be used.

Applicable standard envelopes: COM-10, Monarch, DL, C5, ISO B5,

CHOKEI 3

ꢀ Envelopes can only be fed from the tray 2.

Applicable paper stock weight for envelopes is 75 to 90 g/m or 20 to 23 lbs..

ꢁ Paper that can be used for automatic two-sided printing

Paper used for automatic two-sided printing (paper that can be fed through the duplex module) must meet the

following conditions:

Paper type :Plain paper as specified above.

Paper size :Must be one of the following standard sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or A5R (11" x 17", 8-1/2"

x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)

Paper weight:64 to 105 g/m (16 to 28 lbs.)

NOTES

ꢀ Special papers (explained above) cannot be used for automatic two-sided printing.

ꢀ Various types of plain paper and special paper are sold. Some of these cannot be used in the machine. Please

consult your retailer or your dealer when buying paper.

ꢀ The image quality and toner fusibility of special papers may change due to ambient conditions, operating

conditions, and paper characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of Olivetti standard paper.

2-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOADING PAPER

Setting the paper type and paper size

Follow these steps to change the paper type setting if the paper type is changed in either paper tray. For the paper

types that can be used in each tray, see page 2-3.

1 ^{Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.}

5 ^{Touch the [TYPE / SIZE] key.}

The custom setting

PER TRAY SETTINGS

TYPE / SIZE

screen

will

TRAY 2

PLAIN / A4

FAX

I-FAX

appear.

DOC.

FILING

COPY

2 ^{Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.}

Select the type of paper that was loaded in

the tray.

The paper tray selection

screen will appear.

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

Example: The paper type of tray 2 is selected

RINT

CUSTOM SETTINGS

CANCEL

TRAY 2 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

SELECT THE PAPER TYPE.

ATA

ORWARD

PRINTER

CONDITION

1/2

ENVELOPE

LETTER HEAD

HEAVY PAPER

LABELS

PLAIN

PRE-PRINTED

RECYCLED

PRE-PUNCHED

COLOUR

TRANSPARENCY

3 ^{Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.}

1/2

Touch the desired paper type to select it. The

paper size setting screen will appear.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

NOTE

TRAY SETTINGS

Heavy paper, label sheets and transparency film

cannot be used in trays 1, 3, and 4. Envelopes can

only be placed in tray 2.

ꢁ User type

Display the setting screen of the desired

paper tray.

Set a user type when a paper type is not available

as an option. To select a user type, touch the

key in the screen of step 6 to display the user type

selection screen. To store or edit a user type name

or set tray attributes, see "Programming and

editing paper types" on page 2-7.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

FIXED PAPER SIDE

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

TYPE / SIZE

PLAIN / A4

1/4

TRAY 1

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE STAPLE

DISABLE PUNCH

DOC.

FILING

I-FAX

COPY

FAX

CUSTOM SETTINGS

CANCEL

TRAY 2 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

SELECT THE PAPER TYPE

Touch the

setting screen of the desired paper tray.

key or

key to display the

2/2

USER TYPE 1

USER TYPE 5

USER TYPE 2

USER TYPE 6

USER TYPE 3

USER TYPE 7

USER TYPE 4

NOTE

To automatically switch to a tray with the same size

and type of paper (if there is one) in the event that the

paper tray runs out of paper, display the last screen

1/2

with the

key and select [AUTO TRAY

SWITCHING].

2-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOADING PAPER

Select the size of paper that was loaded in

the tray.

Touch the [OK] key in the size setting

screen.

Touch the appropriate keys (checkboxes).

You will return to the tray setting screen of step 4.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

TYPE

TRAY 2 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

TYPE

Select output functions that can be used

with the selected tray.

SIZE

POST

11X17,8²X14,8²X11

PLAIN

AUTO-INCH

Touch the checkboxes

under the desired items

to select them.

²X11R,7⁴X10²,5²X8

DOC.

FILING

A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5

B5R,216X330(8²X13)

I-FAX

FAX

COPY

AUTO-AB

NON STANDARD

SIZE

SIZE INPUT

X17

Y11

2/2

Checkboxes that can be

selected

depending on the options

that are installed.

will

vary

[AUTO-INCH] key

[AUTO-AB] key

Select when you have loaded

an inch-based size of paper.

: Select when you have

loaded an AB size of paper.

Configure paper settings for each tray and

then touch the [OK] key to exit.

[SIZE INPUT] key : Select to directly enter a

paper size (see page 2-6).

[NON STANDARD: Select when you have

NOTE

SIZE] checkbox

loaded a non-standard size

of paper (see page 2-6).

The type and size of paper loaded in the bypass tray

can also be set from the paper selection screen.

Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key at the top of the

base screen to display the paper selection screen,

touch the [PAPER SELECT] key for the bypass tray,

and then go to step 6.

[POST] key

: Select this when you have

loaded postcards.

NOTE

Sizes that can be selected vary depending on the

selected paper type.

Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded

NOTE

Special sizes of paper cannot be loaded in trays 1, 3 and 4.

Tray 2 and the bypass tray

Perform steps 1 through 6 of "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (see page 2-5).

4 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

You will return to the size

setting screen of step 2.

Touch the [SIZE INPUT] key and then

touch the [AB] tab.

(148

432)

297)

300

100

The size entry palette

(100

appears.

(148

432)

297)

420

297

INCH

(100

INCH

If the paper is a non-standard size, select

the [NON STANDARD SIZE] checkbox.

17,8

14,8

X11

11R,7

10²,5

Touch the

key or the

key to enter

A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5

B5R,216x330(8²x13)

the X (width) and Y (length) dimensions of

the paper.

NON STANDARD

SIZE

X17 Y11⁸

Entry of the X dimension

(width)

initially

selected. Touch the [Y]

key and enter the Y

dimension (length) in the

same way as the X

dimension.

(148

432)

297)

300

100

Perform steps 8 through 10 of "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (see page 2-6).

(100

INCH

2-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOADING PAPER

Programming and editing paper types

To program or edit the name of a paper type or set paper attributes, follow the steps below.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Setting the paper

type and paper size" (page 2-5)

"FIXED PAPER SIDE" : Select when paper is to be

loaded print side down in the

tray. Make sure a checkmark

does not appear when paper is

to be loaded print side up.

Touch the [PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION]

key.

• If the two-sided function is

prohibited in "DISABLING OF

DUPLEX" in the key operator

programs (page 11 of the Key

operator’s guide), do not use

this setting.

PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION

"DISABLE DUPLEX" : Prohibits two-sided printing.

Enable when the back side of

the paper cannot be printed on.

"DISABLE STAPLE" : Prohibits stapling. Enable

when using special papers

such as transparency film and

label sheets.

Select the paper type that you wish to

program or edit.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

TRAY 2 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

SELECT THE PAPER TYPE

"DISABLE PUNCH" : Prohibits punching. Enable

when using special papers

such as transparency film and

label sheets.

USER TYPE 1

USER TYPE 5

USER TYPE 2

USER TYPE 6

USE

NOTE

"FIXED PAPER SIDE" and "DISABLE DUPLEX"

cannot be simultaneously enabled.

4 ^{Touch the [TYPE NAME] key.}

Touch the [EXIT] key to exit the

programming/editing procedure.

A character entry screen

appears.

PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION

No.01

TYPE NAME

USER TYPE 1

Enter

type name

of 14

CANCEL

EXIT

(maximum

characters). (See page

7-26 to enter characters.)

DISAB

FIXED PAPER SIDE

DISABLE STAPLE

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE PUNCH

5 ^{Set the attributes of the paper tray.}

PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION

Touch the checkboxes

to the left of the items to

select them.

No.01

TYPE NAME

USER TYPE 1

DISAB

FIXED PAPER SIDE

DISABLE STAPLE

2-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOADING PAPER

Loading paper in the multi purpose drawer

The method of loading paper into the multipurpose drawer is the same as for paper tray 1 described on page 2-2.

For specifications of paper, see page 2-3. When loading envelopes, postcards or transparency film, follow the

descriptions below.

ꢀ Two maximum height lines are indicated: one for plain paper and one for special paper.

Maximum height line for plain paper

Do not exceed this line when loading plain paper.

Maximum height line special paper (red line)

Do not exceed this line when loading special paper.

ꢁ How to change the paper size

To change the paper size or paper type when paper is loaded into the multi purpose drawer, refer to page 2-5 for

details.

ꢁ Setting envelopes or postcards

When setting envelopes or postcards in the multi purpose drawer, set them in the orientation shown below.

Loading postcards

Load postcards print side up to the rear left of the tray

as shown.

Loading envelopes

Envelopes can only be printed on the address side. Be

sure to place envelopes with the address side up and

the top of the envelope to the rear.

Printing onto envelopes or postcards

ꢀ Attempting to print onto both sides of envelopes or postcards may result in misfeeds or poor prints.

ꢀ Do not use paper that has already been printed on by a thermal transfer or inkjet printer. In particular, paper

that has been printed on by a thermal transfer printer (such as a word processor that uses a cassette) may

cause missing characters and smudges.

ꢀ To avoid wrinkling, misfeeds or poor printing, make sure the postcard or envelopes stock is not curled.

2-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOADING PAPER

Printing onto envelopes

ꢀ Do not use envelopes that have metal clasps, plastic snaps, string closures, windows, linings, self-adhesive

patches or synthetic materials. Attempting to print on these may cause misfeeds, inadequate toner adherence or

other trouble.

ꢀ Creases or smudging may occur. This is especially true of embossed surfaces and other irregular surfaces.

ꢀ Under high humidity and temperature conditions the glue flaps on some envelopes may become sticky and be

sealed closed when printed.

ꢀ Use only envelopes which are flat and crisply folded. Curled or poorly formed envelopes may be poorly printed or

may cause misfeeds.

Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers

When feeding envelopes from the multi purpose drawer, damage to the envelopes or smudges on prints may occur

even if envelopes within specification are used. In this case, the problem may be reduced by shifting the fusing unit

pressure adjusting levers from the normal position to the lower pressure position. Follow the procedure below.

NOTE

Be sure to return the lever to the normal position when finished feeding envelopes. If not, inadequate toner

adherence, paper misfeeds or other trouble may occur.

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

3 ^{Gently close the duplex module.}

If the machine is not

Unlatch the module and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, open the side

cover similarly.

equipped with a duplex

module, close the side

cover.

Lower the two fusing unit pressure

adjusting levers marked A and B in the

illustration.

Normal position

Lower pressure position

A: Rear side of

fusing unit

B: Front side of

fusing unit

2-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOADING PAPER

Q Loading transparency film

Be sure to load the transparency film with the white label side up. Make sure no image will be printed on the label.

Printing on the label may cause smudges on prints. Transparency film must be set in the portrait orientation.

Specifications (multi purpose drawer)

Name

Multi purpose drawer

Paper size/weight

See specifications of paper trays on page 2-3.

500 sheets (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) of paper, 40 envelopes, 40 postcards, 40 sheets of

transparency film

Paper capacity

654 mm (W) x 567 mm (D) x 144 mm (H)

(25-3/4" (W) x 22-21/64" (D) x 5-43/64" (H))

Dimensions

Weight

Approximately 11 kg or 24.3 lbs.

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

Loading paper in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer

Upper paper tray:

The upper tray is the same as the multi-purpose drawer. Use the upper tray according to the instructions for the

multi-purpose drawer on page 2-8.

Middle and lower paper trays:

Up to 500 sheets of Olivetti recommended plain paper can be loaded in these trays. The method of loading paper

is the same as for paper tray 1 in the main unit. See the description (page 2-2).

NOTE

If the paper size or paper type is changed in either paper tray, the tray settings must be changed in custom settings.

Refer to "Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-5.

Specifications (stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer)

Name

Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer

Paper size/weight

See specifications of paper trays on page 2-3.

Paper capacity

(ordinary paper)

500 sheets (80 g/m (20 lbs.) each

589 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x 404 mm (H)

(23-3/16" (W) x 24-51/64" (D) x 15-29/32" (H))

Dimensions

Weight

Approximately 32.9 kg or 70.6 lbs.

2-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOADING PAPER

Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer

Upper paper tray:

The upper paper tray is equivalent to the multi purpose drawer. The method of loading paper and the paper that can

be used are the same as for the multi purpose drawer. Refer to the description of the multi purpose drawer (see page

2-8).

Lower paper tray:

The lower paper tray is a large capacity tray that holds 2,000 sheets of A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" paper (80 g/m (20 lbs.)).

Use the following procedure to load paper in the large capacity tray.

NOTE

If the paper size or paper type is changed in either paper tray, the tray settings must be changed in custom settings.

Refer to "Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-5.

Gently push the large capacity paper tray

into the machine.

1 ^{Pull out the large capacity tray.}

Gently pull the tray out

until it stops.

Push the tray firmly all

the way into the

machine.

Load paper onto the right and left paper

feed tables.

4 ^{Set the paper type.}

Load paper onto the

right paper feed table.

The right table holds

If you have changed the paper size from the AB

system to the inch system or vice versa, select the

relevant type referring to "Setting the paper type

and paper size" on page 2-5.

approximately

sheets.

1,200

Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000

sheet paper drawer is now complete.

Raise the paper guide

and load paper onto the

left paper feed table.

The left table holds

approximately

800

sheets. After loading

paper, be sure to return

the paper guide.

Specifications (stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer)

Name

Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer

Paper size/weight

See specifications of paper trays on page 2-3.

Paper capacity

(ordinary paper)

Upper tray: 500 sheets (80 g/m (20 lbs.)), Lower tray: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m (20

lbs.))

589 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x 404 mm (H)

(23-3/16" (W) x 24-51/64" (D) x 15-29/32" (H))

Dimensions

Weight

Approximately 34 kg or 75 lbs.

2-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

The items that can be set with the custom settings are shown below.

● Total count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .The number of pages processed by the machine and optional equipment

can be displayed. (See page 2-14)

● Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to configure the screen contrast, date and time, and keyboard

selection* settings. (See page 2-14)

● List print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to print lists of settings and fonts. (See page 2-14)

● Paper tray settings . . . . . . . . . . . .The paper type, paper size and automatic tray switching can be set for each

tray. Automatic tray switching allows feeding to switch between trays loaded

with the same type and size of paper. If one tray runs out of paper during

printing, printing will continue from the other tray. (See page 2-14)

For the detailed descriptions and use of the settings listed below, see the fax, network scanner, and

printer manuals.

● Address control* . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to store information for various functions.

● Sender control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to program the sender's information that appears on your Scan to E-

mail transmissions at the destination.

receive/forward . . . . . .Faxes received to memory and received Internet faxes can be forwarded to

●

Fax data

another destination.

● Printer condition* . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to configure default settings for the printer function (see the Operation

manual (for printer)).

●

Document filing control

. . . . . . . . Used to configure default settings for the document filing function. (pages 7-21

to 7-25)

● Key operator programs. . . . . . . . .These are programs that are used by the key operator (administrator of the

machine) to configure machine settings. A key appears for these settings in

the custom settings menu screen. For information on these settings, see

the key operator's guide.

These settings can be configured in a system where the facsimile or network scanner function is available.

These settings can be configured in a system where the network scanner function is available.

These settings can be configured in a system where the printer function is available.

These settings can be configured in a system where the document filing function is available.

General procedure for custom settings

1 ^{Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.}

3 ^{Touch the [CLOCK] key.}

Touch the [CLOCK] key and then the following

screen appears.

The custom settings

screen

will

appear.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

CLOCK ADJUST

YEAR

2004

MONTH

DAY

HOUR

MINUTE

DATE FORMAT

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING

Touch the key of the desired item to

display its setting screen.

The example of selecting the [DEFAULT SETTINGS]

key and then the [CLOCK] key is explained below.

Touch the year, month, day, hour or minute

key, and then use the

adjust the setting.

key to

CUSTOM SETTINGS

EXIT

DEFAULT

SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

LIST PRINT

TOTAL COUNT

●If you select a non-existent date (for example,

Feb. 30), the [OK] key will grey out to prevent

entry of the date.

PRINTER

CONDITION

FAX DATA

SENDER CONTROL

ADDRESS CONTROL

RECEIVE/FORWARD

DOCUMENT FILING

CONTROL

KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS

●Select [DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING]

checkbox to have the time automatically

change at the beginning and end of daylight

saving time.

Detailed descriptions for program settings start on

the next page.

2-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

5 ^{Touch the [DATE FORMAT] key.}

More information on setting procedures

In the following type of screen, a setting is selected

by touching the key so that a checkmark (

appears. The settings below are configured to

allow use of tray 1 in print, copy, and fax modes. To

The following screen appears.

)

CUSTOM SETTINGS

DATE FORMAT

2004/10/20/MON 14:27

DAY-NAME

display the next screen, touch the

keys.

YYYY/MM/DD

POSITION

FIRST

12-HOUR

24-HOUR

MM/DD/YYYY

CUSTOM SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

TYPE / SIZE

DD/MM/YYYY

LAST

FIXED PAPER SIDE

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE STAPLE

DISABLE PUNCH

1/4

TRAY1

PLAIN / A4

If you wish to change the format of the date

and time, touch the desired format keys.

DOC.

FILING

I-FAX

COPY

FAX

Touched keys are highlighted.

The selected format is applied to lists printed out in

"LIST PRINT".

7 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

You will return to the

date and time setting

screen.

AME

12-HOUR

8 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

9 ^{To exit the settings, touch the [EXIT] key.}

CUSTOM SETTINGS

EXIT

DEFAULT

PAPER TRAY

LIST PRINT

TOTAL COUNT

SETTINGS

FAX DATA

PRINTER

ADDRESS CONTROL

SENDER CONTROL

RECEIVE/FORWARD

CONDITION

DOCUMENT FILING

CONTROL

KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS

2-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

About the settings

Q Total count

Q List print

This displays the following sheet counts (the

counts that can be displayed vary depending on

the options installed):

This is used to print lists of machine settings and a

test page to check resident fonts.

The following lists and pages are available:

(1) Number of pages output by the machine.

(2) Number of original pages transmitted by the

machine.

(3) Number of times the automatic document

feeder was used to feed original pages and

number of times the stapler was used (if

installed).

OAll custom setting list

Shows the hardware status, software status,

printer configuration settings, tray settings, and

counts.

OPrinter test page

Shows the PCL symbol set list, fonts, network

interface (NIC interface) settings, and settings

used for the NIC card.

(4) Number of pages stored by document filing.

In the case of (1) only,

OSending address list

One touch destination list, group list, program

list, and memory box list.

OA3 (11" x 17") size paper is counted as two

sheets.

OEach sheet of paper used for automatic two-

sided copying is counted as two sheets (A3 (11"

x 17") paper is counted as four sheets).

OPaper with an entered size of 384 mm (15-1/8")

or larger is counted as two sheets (four sheets

during automatic two-sided copying).

ODocument filing user / folder list

Shows the user names and folder names for

document filing.

OSender control list

Shows the senders that have been stored.

NOTE

Q Default settings

A test page cannot be printed if "PROHIBIT TEST

PAGE PRINTING" (See the "Operation manual (for

printer)".) has been set to "prohibited" in the key

operator programs.

The following settings can be configured:

ODisplay contrast

Screen contrast adjustment is used to make the

LCD touch panel easier to view under various

lighting conditions. Touch the [LIGHTER] key to

make the screen lighter, or the [DARKER] key

to make the screen darker.

Q Paper tray settings

The paper type, paper size, enabled modes and

automatic tray switching can set for each tray. See

page 2-5 to 2-7 for details on setting the paper type

and paper size. Automatic switching to another

paper tray is used to automatically switch to

another tray with the same size and type of paper

in the event that the paper runs out during

continuous printing. This requires that the trays be

loaded with the same size of paper. The paper tray

settings can be enabled or disabled for each tray,

and for printer mode, copy mode, fax mode,

Internet fax mode, and document filing mode. To

enable any function, touch the check box key so

OClock

Use this to set the date and time in the

machine's built-in clock. This clock is used by

functions that require date and time information.

OKeyboard select

The layout of the keyboard that appears in letter

entry screens can be changed.

Select the arrangement of the letter keys that

you find easiest to use.

The

following

three

alphabet

keyboard

configurations are available:

that a checkmark

(

)

appears.

O Keyboard 1 (QWERT... configuration)*

O Keyboard 2 (AZERTY...configuration)

O Keyboard 3 (ABCDEF...configuration)

* The default setting is "Keyboard 1".

(Example: Character entry screen when

Keyboard 3 is selected)

ABC abc

2-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE

When toner runs low, a message will appear to inform you that the toner cartridge must be replaced.

NOTE

To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, hold down the [COPY] key during printing or when the

machine is on standby. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while you hold down the key.

When the percentage falls to "25-0%" , obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement.

Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge.

1 ^{Open the front cover.}

5 ^{Insert a new toner cartridge.}

Push the cartridge in

until it locks securely into

place.

Gently remove the sealing tape from the

cartridge.

2 ^{Lower the cartridge lock lever.}

Once the seal is pulled

out, the toner in the toner

cartridge is supplied to

the developer cartridge.

While depressing the lock release button,

pull out the toner cartridge and remove it.

7 ^{Return the cartridge lock lever.}

Remove a new toner cartridge from the

package and shake it horizontally five or

six times.

8 ^{Close the front cover.}

NOTE

Shake

cartridge

the

well

toner

ensure that the toner

flows well and will not

stick to the inside of

the cartridge.

CAUTION

O Do not throw the toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.

O Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.

NOTE

Place the used toner cartridge in the plastic bag and store it. When placing the toner cartridge in the bag, insert it

horizontally, not vertically. If the cartridge is stood on end, the collected used toner may spill out and soil the floor

or your clothes.

2-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

Standard supplies for this product that can replaced by the user include paper, toner cartridges, and staple cartridges

for the finisher.

For best copying results, be sure to use only Olivetti Genuine Supplies which are designed,

engineered, and tested to maximize the life and performance of Olivetti products. Look for

the Genuine Supplies label on the toner package.

GENUINE SUPPLIES

Q Proper storage

1. Store the supplies in a location that is:

O clean and dry,

O at a stable temperature,

O not exposed to direct sunlight.

2. Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat.

3. Paper stored in packages standing up or out of

the wrapper may curl or become damp, resulting

in paper misfeeds.

4. Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally. Do

not store it standing on end. If stored standing on

end, the toner may not distribute well even after

shaking the cartridge vigorously, and will remain

inside the cartridge without flowing out.

Supply and Consumables

The supply of spare parts for a repair of the appliance is guaranteed for at least 7 years following the termination

of production. Spare parts are those parts of the apparatus which may break down within the scope of the ordinary

use of the product - whereas those parts which normally exceed the life of the product are not to be considered

as spare parts. Consumables too, are available for 7 years following the termination of production.

2-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MISFEED REMOVAL

When a misfeed has occurred during printing, the message "A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED". will appear in the touch

panel display of the operation panel and printing including copying and facsimile output will stop. The approximate

misfeed locations are indicated with " " shown in the illustration below. The page numbers for detailed information

on misfeed removal are also shown.

Misfeed in the document feeder (page 2-22)

Misfeed in the finisher (page 3-12)

Misfeed in the mail-bin

stacker (page 3-6)

Misfeed in the transport area, fusing

area, and exit area (page 2-18)

Misfeed in the duplex module

(page 2-19)

Misfeed in the bypass tray (page 2-19)

Misfeed in paper tray 1 (page 2-20)

Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer

(page 2-21)

Misfeed in the stand/3 x 500 sheet

paper drawer (page 2-21)

Misfeed in the saddle

stitch finisher (page

3-22)

Misfeed in the

multi purpose

drawer (page

2-21)

Misfeed in the stand/MPD & 2000

sheet paper drawer (page 2-21)

NOTE

Printing is not possible when a misfeed occurs, and thus any faxes or Internet faxes received at this time will be

temporarily held in memory. The faxes will print out automatically as soon as the misfeed is cleared.

NOTES

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take

care in removing paper.

O Do not damage or touch the photoconductive

drum. (See page 2-18.)

O Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during

removal.

O lf paper is accidentally torn during removal, be

sure to remove all pieces.

Fusing unit

Misfeed removal guidance

Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the [INFORMATION] key on the touch panel after a misfeed

has occurred.

INFORMATION

2-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MISFEED REMOVAL

Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area

If paper is misfed in the

CAUTION

fusing area, turn roller

rotating knob B in the

direction of the arrow to

The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.

(Do not touch the metal parts.)

remove

paper.

the

misfed

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

Roller rotating knob B

Unlatch the module and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, open the side

cover similarly.

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.

(Do not touch any metal parts.)

If the misfed paper is

inside the fusing area,

turn down the fusing unit

open tab to open the

fusing unit and remove

Remove the misfed paper as shown in the

illustrations below.

If paper is misfed in the

transport area, turn roller

rotating knob A in the

direction of the arrow to

Roller rotating knob A

the misfed paper.

Fusing unit open tab

If paper is misfed in the

exit area, remove it as

shown while taking care

not to tear the paper.

remove

paper.

the

misfed

NOTE

Do not touch or

damage the transfer

roller.

If the duplex module is

equipped with an exit

tray and paper is misfed

in the exit area, remove

the misfed paper as

shown in the illustration.

Transfer roller

Do not touch or

damage

the

photoconductive

drum.

3 ^{Gently close the duplex module.}

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, close the side

cover.

Photoconductive drum

After closing, confirm

that

message is cleared and

the normal display

appears.

the

misfeed

2-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MISFEED REMOVAL

Misfeed in the duplex module

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

5 ^{Gently close the duplex module.}

After closing the duplex

module, confirm that the

misfeed message is

cleared and the normal

display appears.

Unlatch the unit and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

If the duplex module has an exit tray, rotate

it up out of the way and open the cover of

Q Misfeed in the bypass tray

the duplex module.

If no exit tray is attached,

just open the cover of

the duplex module and

ignore any reference to

the tray in the following

steps.

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

Unlatch the unit and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

While holding the exit tray up, remove the

misfed paper as shown in the illustrations

below.

If paper is misfed at the

upper part of the duplex

module, gently remove it

while taking care not to

tear the paper.

2 ^{Remove the misfed from the bypass tray.}

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

If paper is misfed at the

lower part of the duplex

module, gently remove it

while taking care not to

tear the paper.

Close the cover of the duplex module and

lower the exit tray.

3 ^{Gently close the duplex module.}

After closing the duplex

module, confirm that the

misfeed message is

cleared and that the

normal display appears.

2-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MISFEED REMOVAL

Misfeed in the paper feed area

NOTE

Be sure to follow the misfeed removal sequence. Do not pull the tray out immediately as the misfeed may have

occurred with paper partially fed out of the tray. Open the left cover and see if there is misfed paper first (steps 1

and 2). If you open the tray without checking, the partially fed paper may tear and leave torn pieces in the machine,

increasing the difficulty of removal.

Q Misfeed in paper tray 1

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

5 ^{Gently close the duplex module.}

If the machine is not

Unlatch the module and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, open the side

cover similarly.

equipped with a duplex

module, close the side

cover.

After closing, confirm

that

message is cleared and

the normal display

appears.

the

misfeed

2 ^{Remove the misfed paper.}

NOTE

Be careful not to tear the

If paper drops beyond the rear side of the paper tray

that has been pulled out, remove the paper tray and

then remove the paper. (For removal of the paper

tray, see the illustration below.)

misfed paper during

removal.

After pulling out the

paper tray until it

stops, gently lift and

pull the tray to remove

it. To reinstall the

paper tray, insert it at

an angle and then

push it into the

machine.

NOTE

The paper may not be extending out far from inside

the machine but must be removed if it is possible to

grasp it. If it is not possible to grasp it, go to the next

step.

If misfed paper is not found in step 2, pull

out paper tray 1 and remove the misfed

paper.

To remove a paper tray from a stand/paper drawer,

pull the tray out until it stops then rotate it to the left

to disengage it from the stand. When reinstalling it,

place the left rear or the drawer into the slot and

rotate the drawer to the right and into the stand.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Installation of trays in the stand/3x500 sheet

paper drawer

The middle and lower trays cannot be installed in the

upper tray position and the upper tray cannot be

installed to the middle and lower tray positions.

(These cannot be pushed into the machine.)

Take care not to install a tray to an improper position

after removing the tray.

4 ^{Gently close the paper tray.}

Push the paper tray

back into the machine.

2-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MISFEED REMOVAL

Q Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer

Q Misfeed in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper

drawer

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

For misfeed removal in the upper tray, follow the

procedure of "Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer"

shown to the left to remove the misfed paper.

Unlatch the module and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, open the side

cover similarly.

Q Misfeed in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet

paper drawer

For misfeed removal in the upper tray, follow the

procedure of "Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer"

shown to the left to remove the misfed paper. For

misfeed removal in the lower large capacity tray,

follow the procedure below.

Open the left cover of the stand/paper

drawer.

Hold the knob and gently

open the cover.

Follow steps 1 to 4 of "Misfeed in the multi

purpose drawer" shown to the left.

If the machine is not

equipped with a stand/

paper drawer, open the

left cover of the multi

purpose drawer.

If misfed paper is not found in step 1, refer

to "Misfeed in paper tray 1" on the

previous page.

If misfed paper is not found in steps 1 and

2, pull out the large capacity tray (lower

tray) and remove the misfed paper as

shown in the illustrations below.

3 ^{Remove the misfed paper.}

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

NOTE

The paper may not be extending out far from inside

the machine but must be removed if it is possible to

grasp it. If it is not possible to grasp it, go to the next

step.

Close the left cover of the stand/paper

drawer.

Raise the paper guide and

remove the misfed paper.

After

removing

the

misfed paper, be sure to

return the paper guide.

4 ^{Gently close the large capacity tray.}

5 ^{Gently close the duplex unit.}

Push the paper tray all

the way into the

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, close the side

cover.

machine.

After closing, confirm that

the misfeed message has

been cleared and the

normal display appears.

5 ^{Gently close the duplex module.}

If misfed paper is not found in step 3, refer to

"Misfeed in paper tray 1" (steps 1 to 5 on the

If the machine is not equipped with a duplex

module, close the side cover.

After closing, confirm that the misfeed message

has been cleared and the normal display appears.

previous page) to remove the misfed paper.

2-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED

Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder

If an original misfeed occurs in the automatic document feeder, follow the steps below to remove the misfed original.

NOTES

O For misfeed removal in the main unit and other peripheral devices, see page 2-17

O When a misfeed occurs, touch the [INFORMATION] key to display detailed information for misfeed removal.

Check locations A and B in the diagram at left to

remove the original.

1 ^{Removing misfeeds from each location.}

2 ^{Open and close the document feeder.}

O Check location A

Opening and closing the

cover clears the misfeed

display. Copying cannot

be resumed until this

step is performed.

Open

the

document

Document feeding area

cover

feeding area cover and

gently remove the misfed

original without tearing it.

However, this step is not

necessary

after

misfeed is removed from location B.

Close the cover securely

so that cover clicks into

place.

A message may appear indicating the number of

originals which must be returned to the document

feeder tray. Return the originals to the document

feeder tray and press the [START] key.

O Check location B

O Misfeed in the transfer unit

Open the document

feeder and turn the

green rotating knob in

the direction of the arrow

to remove any misfed

originals.

2-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you

are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the power switch, unplug the power cord.

Problems related to general use of the machine are described below. For problems related to the copy function, see

page 6-3. For problems related to document filing, see page 7-28. For fax, printer, and network scanner problems,

see the manuals for those functions. For peripheral device problems, see the explanation of the device.

(Note)

If the message "CALL FOR SERVICE. CODE:**-**"

appears in the touch panel, turn off the power switch, wait

about 10 seconds, and then turn the power switch back on. If the message still appears after turning the power

switch off and on several times, it is likely that a failure has occurred that requires service. In this event, stop using

the machine, unplug the power cord, and contact your Olivetti dealer.

Note: Letters and numbers appear in "**-**". When you contact your Olivetti dealer, please tell your dealer what

letters and numbers appear.

Problem

Check

Machine plugged in?

Solution or cause

Plug the machine into a grounded outlet.

Turn on the power switch. (Page 1-17)

The power switch are not turned on?

The machine is warming up. (Warm-up time is

approximately 80 seconds.) Wait until the

READY indicator lights up.

READY indicator off?

The machine does

not operate.

Message indicating need to load paper

displayed?

Load paper. (Page 2-2)

Message indicating need to replace the

toner cartridge displayed?

Replace the toner cartridge. (Page 2-15)

Remove misfed paper. (Page 2-17)

Message indicating a paper misfeed

displayed?

A message appears saying that this type Two-sided printing is not possible on special

of paper cannot be used for two-sided paper. Use paper that can be used for automatic

Copying/printing is

not possible

copying.

two-sided printing. (Page 2-4)

2-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

Check

Solution or cause

If too many pages collect on the output

tray, the tray full sensor activates and Remove the paper from the output tray.

stops printing.

Printing

before the job is

finished

stops

You have run out of paper.

Load paper. (Page 2-2)

Smudges on printed Does a message appear indicating the Please contact the your dealer as soon as

sheets

need for maintenance?

possible.

When loading paper, if you change the paper

size from an inch size to an AB size, or from an

AB size to an inch size, or change the paper

type, be sure to set the new paper type as

explained in "Setting the paper type and paper

size" (see page 2-5).

The

displayed

paper size or paper The correct paper size or paper type is

type does not match not set in the paper tray settings of the

the loaded paper custom settings.

size or paper type.

When printing on a

When using a special size of paper, set the

special

size

of The paper size setting is not set correct paper size as explained in "Setting the

paper, part of the correctly in the paper tray settings of the paper type and paper size" on page 2-5. If the

printed image is custom settings.

missing.

paper size setting is not correct, part of the image

may be cut off or the image may not print.

paper

other

than

Olivetti-

Use Olivetti-recommended paper. (Page 2-16

)

recommended paper being used?

Solution or cause

Use Olivetti-recommended paper. (Page 2-16

paper

Olivetti-

)

Is paper size or weight out of the

allowable range?

Use paper in the allowable range.

Printed paper is

wrinkled or the

Be sure to store paper in the wrapper in a dry

location and do not store paper in a location that is

Ohumid

image

easily.

rubs

off

Oat a high temperature or an extremely low

Paper damp?

temperature

Oexposed to direct sunlight

Odusty.

The contrast on the

touch panel is too Is LCD contrast properly adjusted?

high or too low.

Adjust the screen contrast using "DISPLAY

CONTRAST" in "Default settings" of the custom

settings. (Page 2-14)

Load paper in the tray with the print side face up.

However, if the paper type is "PRE-PRINTED",

"PRE-PUNCHED" or "LETTER HEAD", load the

paper with the print side face down*.

* If the two-sided function has been prohibited

using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the key

operator programs (page 11 of the Key

operator's guide), load the paper face up.

The paper is loaded in the tray with the

Printing takes place print side face down*.

on the wrong side of * Face up if the paper type is "PRE-

the paper.

PRINTED", "PRE-PUNCHED" or

"LETTER HEAD".

If the original image overlaps the punch holes,

marks will appear at the position of the holes on

the back of the paper after one-sided printing, or

on the front and back of the paper after two-

sided printing. Make sure that the original image

does not overlap the punch holes.

Marks appear at

regular intervals on Paper with punch holes is being used.

printed pages.

2-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER 3

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

This chapter describes operating instructions for the Mail-Bin Stacker,

the Finisher, the Saddle Stitch Finisher, and the Duplex Module.

Page

DUPLEX MODULE ................................................................................. 3-2

ꢀ

Part names...................................................................................... 3-2

ꢀ

Specifications.................................................................................. 3-2

ꢀ

Loading paper in the bypass tray.................................................... 3-3

ꢀ

Troubleshooting (concerning the duplex module)........................... 3-4

MAIL-BIN STACKER .............................................................................. 3-5

ꢀ

Part names...................................................................................... 3-5

ꢀ

Specifications.................................................................................. 3-5

ꢀ

Misfeed in the mail-bin stacker........................................................ 3-6

FINISHER ............................................................................................... 3-7

ꢀ

Part names...................................................................................... 3-7

ꢀ

Specifications.................................................................................. 3-7

ꢀ

Finisher functions............................................................................ 3-8

ꢀ

Using the finisher functions............................................................. 3-9

ꢀ

Staple cartridge replacement .......................................................... 3-10

ꢀ

Misfeed in the finisher ..................................................................... 3-12

ꢀ

Troubleshooting finisher problems.................................................. 3-13

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER.................................................................. 3-14

ꢀ

Part names...................................................................................... 3-14

ꢀ

Specifications.................................................................................. 3-14

ꢀ

Saddle stitch finisher functions........................................................ 3-15

ꢀ

Using the saddle stitch finisher ....................................................... 3-18

ꢀ

Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal.................... 3-19

ꢀ

Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher ................................................ 3-22

ꢀ

Troubleshooting (concerning the saddle stitch finisher).................. 3-24

3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DUPLEX MODULE

If a duplex module is installed, printing onto both sides of paper can be performed.

Two types of duplex modules are available: duplex module/bypass tray and duplex module. The descriptions in this

manual are for the duplex module/bypass tray. For information on misfeed removal for these modules, see page

2-19.

Part names

Exit tray

Duplex module

Automatic copying on both sides of the

paper is possible.

The tray is extendable to support

large size paper. Extend the tray

when A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x

14" or 8-1/2" x 13" paper is being

used. For a duplex module (not

duplex module/bypass tray), the

exit tray is optional.

NOTE

Automatic two-sided printing can

be done only onto plain paper.

Special papers cannot be used

for two-sided printing. (See page

2-4 for explanation on special

paper.)

Bypass tray

This tray can also be used for special

papers including transparency film.

(See next page and page 2-3.)

NOTES

O Do not press down on the bypass tray or the exit tray.

O The duplex module requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot be

installed together with some other devices. The table on page 8-4 shows the configurations which are

compatible.

Specifications

Name

Duplex module (AR-DU3) or Duplex module/bypass tray (AR-DU4)

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R,

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2 "x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" R

Paper size (for duplex copy)*

Paper weight (for duplex copy)*

Reference paper position

60 to 105 g/m or 16 to 28 lbs.

Centre

Bypass tray paper capacity*

100 sheets (A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size, 80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

Duplex module: 115 mm (W) x 412 mm (D) x 416 mm (H)

(4-17/32" (W) x 16-15/64" (D) x 16-25/64" (H))

Duplex module/bypass tray* : 441 mm (W) x 436 mm (D) x 416 mm (H)

Dimensions

(17-23/64" (W) x 17-11/64" (D) x 16-25/64" (H))

Duplex module: Approx. 5 kg (11.1 lbs.)

Duplex module/bypass tray: Approx. 7.5 kg (16.6 lbs.)

Weight

For paper size and paper weight for the bypass tray, see "Specifications of paper trays (types and sizes of

applicable papers for trays)" on page 2-3.

Duplex module/bypass tray only.

When the bypass tray extension is extended.

Name

Paper output

Exit tray (AR-TE3)

Print face down

Paper capacity

Paper size

100 sheets (A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size, 80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

Max. A3 or 11" x 17", Min. A5R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R

Plain paper, 60 to 105 g/m or 16 to 28 lbs.

Heavy paper, 106 to 205 g/m or 29 to 110 lbs.

Paper type and weight to be output

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

3-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DUPLEX MODULE

Loading paper in the bypass tray

The bypass tray can be used for plain paper and special paper including labels. Up to 100 sheets of standard paper

can be set. For paper types that can be used in the bypass tray, refer to page 2-3.

NOTE

If the paper type or size is changed, be sure to enter the paper type and size as in step 4.

1 ^{Open the bypass tray.}

NOTES

● When using A5 paper, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper or

postcards, be sure to load them with their shorter edge

into the feed slot as shown in the illustration.

When setting A3, B4,

11"x 17", 8-1/2" x 14" or

8-1/2" x 13 paper, be

sure to extend the

bypass tray extension.

If the bypass tray

extension is not pulled

all the way out the size of

the loaded paper will not

be correctly displayed.

●

When loading plain paper other than Olivetti standard paper,

special media other than postcards, Olivetti-recommended

transparency film, or paper to be printed on the back, the

paper must be loaded one sheet at a time. Loading more than

one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds.

Bypass tray extension

● When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in

the tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and

reload as a single stack.

● Do not use paper that has already been printed on by

a plain paper fax machine or a laser printer. This may

cause printed images to become dirty.

● Do not use paper that has already been printed on by

a thermal transfer or inkjet printer. In particular, paper

that has been printed on by a thermal transfer printer

(such as a word processor that uses a cassette) may

cause missing characters and smudges.

● When printing on transparency film, be sure to remove

each sheet as it exits the machine. Allowing sheets to

stack in the output tray may cause curling.

Set the bypass tray paper guides to the

width of the paper to be used.

● Please use Olivetti-recommended transparency film.

Place the film in the bypass tray so that it is oriented

vertically with the label side face up. If the label side is

placed face down, smudging may result.

Insert the paper all the way into the bypass

tray.

Label facing up

Set the paper face down.

If there is a clearance

between the paper and

the paper guides, the

paper may not be fed

correctly. Adjust the

guides so that they

contact the edges of the

paper.

●

When loading multiple sheets of transparency film in the bypass

tray, be sure to fan the sheets several times before loading.

4 ^{Set the type and size of the loaded paper.}

When the paper system is changed from the inch

system to the AB system or vise versa or when the

paper type is changed, the paper type must be

designated. For setting the paper type and paper

size, see page 2-5.

Loading paper in the bypass tray is now

complete.

3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DUPLEX MODULE

Troubleshooting (concerning the duplex module)

Check the list below before calling for service.

Problem

Check

Solution or cause

Message indicating the paper type Special paper cannot be used for two-sided

cannot be used for two-sided printing printing. Use a paper type adequate for

displayed?

two-sided printing. (See pages 2-4 and 3-2.)

Message indicating the paper size

cannot be used for two-sided printing

displayed?

The machine will not

print duplex prints.

Use a paper size adequate for two-sided

printing. (See pages 2-4 and 3-2.)

When using A3, B4, 11

x 17", 8-1/2" x 14" or

Bypass tray extension not extended?

8-1/2 x 13 paper, the bypass tray extension

must be extended.

Printed images onto Does the number of sheets exceed the

paper from the limit?

Set paper within the allowable range.

bypass tray are

Paper guides properly set?

skewed.

Set the paper guides properly to the paper size.

When using non-standard size paper or special

paper, be sure to set the paper size and type.

(See pages 2-3 to 2-5.)

Paper size and type set properly?

paper misfeed

occurs in the bypass

tray.

Does the number of sheets exceed the

limit?

Set paper within the allowable range.

Paper guides properly set?

Set the paper guides properly to the paper size.

When using a special size of paper, set the

When printing on a

special

size

of The paper size setting is not set correct paper size as explained in "Setting the

paper, part of the correctly in the paper tray settings of the paper type and paper size" on page 2-5. If the

printed image is custom settings.

missing.

paper size setting is not correct, part of the image

may be cut off or the image may not print.

3-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIL-BIN STACKER

The mail-bin stacker has 7 mail bins which can each be designated to receive printed output from a user or a group

of users .

Output paper in the copy mode and the fax mode will be delivered to the top tray of the stacker separated from printed

output. (Printed output can also be delivered to the top tray.)

Part names

Top cover

Open for misfeed removal.

Top tray

Output paper from the printer,

copier, and facsimile features

can be delivered here.

Mail bins

Front cover

Each bin can be designated

to receive printed output for

assigned users. These bins

cannot be used for copier or

facsimile output.

Open for misfeed removal.

NOTES

● Do not put pressure on the mail-bin stacker, particularly on the top tray and mail bins.

● Do not place anything on the top cover. Doing so will interfere with the machine’s paper handling during duplex

printing.

● The top tray and each mail bin are extendable. To print onto large paper (A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14" or 8-1/2"

x 13"), extend the tray.

● The mail-bin stacker requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot be

installed together with some other devices. The table on page 8-4 shows the configurations which are

compatible.

Specifications

Name

Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1)

Number of trays

Paper output

Tray type

8 (Top tray and seven mail bins)

Print face down

Top tray: normal tray, Mail bins: mail bin tray

Top tray: 250 sheets (A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size, 80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

Mail bins: 100 sheets each (A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size, 80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

Tray capacity

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit

Paper sizes

Mail bins: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11

8-1/2 x 11 R, 7-1/4 x 10-1/2

x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11",

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit

Mail bins: 60 to 105 g/m or 15 to 34 lbs.

Paper weight

Paper types

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit

Mail bins: plain paper only

Tray full detection

Power supply

Provided in both the top tray and the mail bins

Supplied from machine

503 mm* (W) x 530 mm (D) x 508 mm (H) (19-51/64"* (W) x 20-7/8" (D) x 20" (H))

* When the top tray is extended.

Dimensions

Weight

Approx. 19 kg (41.9 lbs.)

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

3-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAIL-BIN STACKER

Misfeed in the mail-bin stacker

If a misfeed has occurred in the mail-bin stacker during printing, remove the misfed paper following the procedure

below.

1 ^{Open the top cover.}

6 ^{Remove the misfed paper.}

Move the tab in the

direction of the arrow as

shown in the illustration

to open the top cover.

Be careful not to tear the

Top cover

misfed paper during

removal.

2 ^{Remove the misfed paper.}

7 ^{Close the paper guide.}

Be careful not to tear the

Close the paper guide

securely.

misfed paper during

removal.

After

removing

the

paper, press down on

the top cover to close it.

If the misfed paper is not found in step 2,

open the front cover.

8 ^{Close the front cover.}

Turn the roller rotating knob in the

direction of the arrow to remove the

misfed paper.

5 ^{Open the paper guide.}

Unlatch the paper guide

and open it in the

direction of the arrow.

3-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FINISHER

The finisher can deliver collated sets either stapled or unstapled. Unstapled sets can be offset stacked from the

previous set for easy separation of the sets.

Part names

Latch

Top tray

Printer, copier and fax

output can be delivered

here.

Release the latch to open the

finisher for misfeed removal.

To print onto large paper

(A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x

Top cover

14", or 8-1/2"

extend the tray.

13"),

Open for misfeed

removal.

Staple box

Pull the box out to

replace the staple

cartridge

remove

staples.

jammed

Offset tray

Stapled sets or sets to be

offset will be delivered

here.

NOTES

● Do not put pressure on the finisher (particularly each tray).

● Do not place anything on the top cover. Doing so will interfere with the machine’s paper handling during duplex

printing.

● The tray moves up and down during operation. Be careful not to impede its movement.

● The finisher requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot be installed

together with some other devices. The table on page 8-4 shows the configurations which are compatible.

Specifications

Name

Finisher (AR-FN6)

Number of trays

Paper output

Tray type

Print face down

Top tray: normal tray, Lower tray: offset tray

Top tray: 500 sheets (A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size, 80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

Tray capacity

Paper sizes

Paper weight

Paper types

Lower tray: 750 sheets (A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size, 80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit

Lower tray: Max. A4 or 8-1/2" x 11", Min. B5

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit

Lower tray: 60 to 128 g/m or 16 to 34 lbs.

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit Lower tray:

plain paper only

Tray full detection

Offset function

Provided in both the top tray and the lower tray

Provided for the lower tray only. The offset amount is approx. 25 mm (1 inch)

A4, B5, and 8-1/2" x 11"

Paper sizes for stapling

30 sheets* (A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" or smaller 80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

Stapling capacity

Staples

*Up two sheets of cover stock (128 g/m or 34 lbs.) can be included.

Single staple can be placed in the top left or lower left corners or two staples can be

centred on the left side

Power supply

Dimensions

Weight

Supplied from machine

473 mm* (W) x 530 mm (D) x 508 mm (H) (18-5/8"* (W) x 20-7/8" (D) x 20" (H))

Approx. 21 kg (46.3 lbs.)

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

* When the top tray is extanded.

Supplies

SC1 staple cartridges must be used for this finisher. The cartridge

package contains three cartridges approx. 3000 staples each.

3-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FINISHER

Finisher functions

ꢁ Sort mode

ꢁ Group mode

Sorted sets will be delivered.

Groups of prints or copies of the same page will be

delivered.

Original

Printouts

Original

Printouts

ꢁ Offset mode

Offset mode

Non-offset mode

Sets will move from side to side so that each set or

group will be offset from the previous set or group

for easy separation. The offset function can only be

used in the offset tray.

Stapled sets will not be offset.

ꢁ Staple sort mode

Collated sets will be stapled and delivered to the offset tray. The stapling positions, orientation, paper size for

stapling, and stapling capacity are shown below.

Stapling positions

Portrait orientation

Landscape orientation

Top left corner of

printouts

Available paper sizes: A4, B5,

and 8-1/2" x 11"

Stapling capacity: Up to 30

sheets for any available sizes

Centre left two

positions of printouts

Same as above

Stapling cannot be made.

Lower left corner

of printouts

NOTES

ꢀ Stapling can only be done when the offset tray has been selected.

ꢀ If mixed paper sizes are selected for stapling jobs, stapling will be automatically cancelled.

NOTE

Transparency film heavy paper, punched paper, labels , envelopes and postcards cannot be stapled.

3-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FINISHER

Using the finisher functions

When the [OUTPUT] key on the main screen of copy mode is touched, a screen for selecting the sort/group/staple

sort functions and selecting an exit tray will appear. As a selection is made, the touch key for the selection will be

highlighted.

OUTPUT

(8)

SORT

TOP TRAY

(7)

STAPLE

SORT

OFFSET

TRAY

(6)

OFFSET

GROUP

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5)

(1) [GROUP] key (See page 3-8.)

(5) [OFFSET] key (See page 3-8.)

When Group is selected, all copies of the same

original will be grouped.

If Offset is checked, offset is enabled. If not

checked, offset will not function. If staple sort is

selected, the check mark of offset will be

automatically cancelled. If the staple sort function

is selected, the checkmark in the offset checkbox is

automatically removed.

(2) [STAPLE SORT] key (See page 3-8.)

When Staple Sort is selected, sorted sets will be

stapled and delivered to the offset tray. (They will

not be offset stacked.)

(6) [OFFSET TRAY] key (See page 3-8.)

When the offset tray is selected, copies will be

delivered to the offset tray. When staple sort is

selected, the offset tray will be automatically

selected.

(3) [SORT] key (See page 3-8.)

When Sort is selected, sets of copies will be

sequentially delivered.

(4) Icon display

(7) [TOP TRAY] key

An icon representing a selected function (sort,

staple sort or group) is displayed.

When top tray is selected, copies will be delivered

to the top tray.

(8) [OK] key

Press to close the output screen and to return to

the main screen.

3-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FINISHER

Staple cartridge replacement

When the staple cartridge becomes empty, the message "Add staples." will appear in the message display of the

operation panel.

Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge.

1 ^{Open the front cover.}

NOTES

ꢀ Do not remove the tape from the cartridge before

inserting the staple cartridge into the box.

ꢀ When reinstalling the staple box, push it in until it

clicks into place.

Remove the tape from the staple cartridge

by pulling it straight.

2 ^{Turn the staple unit to face up.}

7 ^{Reinstall the staple box.}

Push the staple box in

Pull the release lever for the staple box

and remove the box.

until it clicks into place.

While pushing the staple unit release lever

to the left, rotate the staple unit to face

down.

Remove the empty staple cartridge from

the staple box.

9 ^{Close the front cover.}

Insert a new staple cartridge into the

staple box aligning the arrow of the staple

cartridge with that of the staple box.

NOTE

Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to

ensure that stapling is performed properly.

When reinstalling the

staple box, push it in

until it clicks into place.

3-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FINISHER

■ Checking the staple unit

If the message "CHECK THE STAPLER UNIT" or "CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR STAPLER JAM" appears,

follow the procedure below.

1 ^{Open the finisher compiler.}

7 ^{Raise the lever at the end of the staple box.}

Release the latch to

Remove the top staple if

it is bent. If bent staples

remain, a staple jam will

occur again.

open

compiler.

the

finisher

Remove the misfed paper from the stapler

compiler.

8 ^{Return the lever to its original position.}

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

3 ^{Close the finisher compiler.}

4 ^{Open the finisher front cover.}

5 ^{Turn the staple unit to face up.}

9 ^{Reinstall the staple box.}

Push the staple box in

until it clicks into place.

While pushing the staple unit release lever to

10_{the left, rotate the staple unit to face down.}

When reinstalling the

staple box, push it in

until it clicks into place.

Close the front cover.

NOTE

Pull the release lever for the staple box

Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to

ensure that stapling is performed properly.

and remove the box.

3-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FINISHER

Misfeed in the finisher

When a misfeed occurs in the finisher, remove the misfed paper following the procedure below.

Remove the misfed paper from the output

area.

Raise the paper guide and remove the

misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Paper

guide

2 ^{Open the finisher top cover.}

6 ^{Close the finisher compiler.}

Move the tab in the

Top cover

direction of the arrow as

shown in the illustration

to open the top cover.

3 ^{Remove the misfed paper.}

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

After

removing

the

paper, press down on

the top cover to close it.

4 ^{Open the finisher compiler.}

Release the latch to

open

the

finisher

compiler.

3-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FINISHER

Troubleshooting finisher problems

Check the list below before calling for service.

Problem

Check

Solution or cause

Close all covers.

Are any finisher covers open?

Open the finisher

as described in

step 4 on page

3-12 and remove

all paper from the

stapler compiler.

The finisher does

not operate.

Message indicating need to remove

paper from the stapler compiler

displayed?

Is a "CHECK THE STAPLER UNIT" or

"CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR Check the staple unit. (See page 3-11.)

STAPLER JAM" message displayed?

Stapling cannot be

performed.

message "ADD STAPLES"

Replace the staple cartridge. (See page 3-10.)

displayed?

Stapling cannot be performed onto different size

paper.

Different size paper included?

Stapled sets are not

stacked correctly or

some sheets in a set

are not stapled.

Paper may be curled heavily depending on the

paper type and quality. Remove paper from the

paper tray or the bypass tray, turn it upside down,

and load it again.

Paper heavily curled?

3-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place two staples for centreline binding of prints or copies and fold them

along the centreline.

An optional hole punching unit is available for installation into the finisher.

Part names

Stapler compiler

Top cover

Paper to be stapled is stacked

Open for misfeed removal.

temporarily.

Stapler section

Open the front cover and

Offset tray

Output which is stapled or offset will

be delivered to this tray.

pull out this section to

replace the staple

cartridge or to remove

jammed staples.

Saddle stitch tray

Front cover

Saddle stitched output is delivered

here.

Open the front cover and pull out this

section for staple cartridge replacement

or to remove jammed staples.

NOTES

O Do not press on the saddle stitch finisher (particularly the offset tray).

O Be careful about the offset tray during printing because the tray moves up and down.

O The saddle stitch finisher requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot

be installed together with some other devices. The table on page 8-4 shows the configurations which are

compatible.

Specifications

Name

Saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7)

Number of trays

Paper output

Tray system

Print face down

Upper tray: offset tray, Lower tray: saddle stitch tray

Upper tray:

Non-stapling: Max. 1,000 sheets for A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" or smaller sizes (80 g/m or 20

lbs.), max. 500 sheets for B4 or 8-1/2" x 13" or larger sizes (80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

Stapling: Max. 50 stapled sets and max. 1,000 sheets for A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" or smaller

Tray capacity

sizes (80 g/m or 20 lbs.), max. 30 stapled sets and max. 500 sheets for B4 or 8-1/2"

x 13" or larger sizes (80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

Lower tray: Stapled print capacity is (6 - 10) sheets x 10 sets or (1 - 5) sheets x 20

sets.

Upper tray: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",

8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R

Lower tray: max. A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R

Paper size

Upper tray: 60 to 205 g/m or 16 to 54 lbs.

Lower tray: 64 to 80 g/m or 17 to 34 lbs.

Paper weight

Paper types

Upper tray: plain paper, thick paper, transparency film

Lower tray: plain paper only

Tray full detection

Offset function

Provided in both trays

Upper tray only

Upper tray: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x

11", and 8-1/2" x 11"R,

Paper sizes for stapling

Lower tray: A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", and 8-1/2" x 11"R

(Continued on next page)

3-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" or smaller size: 50 sheets*(80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

Stapling capacity

Staples

B4 or 8-1/2" x 14" or larger size: 25 sheets*(80 g/m or 20 lbs.)

*Up to two sheets of 128 g/m or 34 lbs. paper can be included as covers.

Upper tray: Single staple can be placed in the top left or lower left corners or two

staples can be centred on the left side.

Lower tray: 120 mm (4-47/64") pitch from the centre of paper

Power supply

Dimensions

Weight

Supplied from machine

753 mm* (W) x 603 mm (D) x 953 mm (H) (29-41/64"* (W) x 23-3/4" (D) x 37-33/64" (H))

*When the top tray is extended.

Approx. 39 kg (86 lbs.)

Name

Punch module

Model*

AR-PN1A

AR-PN1B*

AR-PN1C*

AR-PN1D*

Number of holes

3 or 2

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 3 holes: A3, A4,

A3, A4

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,

Paper sizes for hole B5R,

punching

11"x17", 11"x17", 8-1/2"x11",

B5R,

11"x17",

8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2"x11", 2 holes: 8-1/2"x14",

8-1/2"x11"R 8-1/2" x 11"R

8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2"x11",

8-1/2"x11"R,

*1 Multiple punch modules cannot be installed together. Some models may not be available in some regions.

*2 With PN1B, two or three holes can be punched depending on the paper size.

*3 With PN1C and PN1D, the number of holes is the same. The hole interval, however, is not the same.

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

Supplies

SC2 staple cartridges must be used for this finisher. The cartridge package

contains three cartridges approx. 5000 staples each.

Saddle stitch finisher functions

■ Sort mode

■ Group mode

Sorted sets will be delivered.

Groups of copies of the same page will be

delivered.

Original

Printouts

Original

Printouts

■ Offset mode

Offset mode

Non-offset mode

Sets will move from side to side so that each set or

group will be offset from the previous set or group

for easy separation. The offset function can only be

used in the offset tray.

Stapled sets will not be offset.

3-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

Q Staple sort mode

Collated sets of prints or copies will be stapled and delivered to the offset tray. When saddle stitching is selected,

the prints or copies will be stapled at the centre and delivered to the saddle stitch tray. The stapling positions,

orientation, paper size for stapling, and stapling capacity are shown below.

Stapling positions

Portrait orientation

Landscape orientation

Top left corner of

printouts

Available paper sizes: A4,

B5, and 8-1/2" x 11"

Stapling capacity: Up to 50

sheets for any sizes

Available paper sizes: A3, B4,

A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-

1/2" x 13", and 8-1/2" x 11" R

Stapling capacity: Up to 50

sheets for A4R, B5R, and 8-1/2"

x 11"R, and up to 25 sheets for

other sizes

Available paper sizes: A3, B4,

A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-

1/2" x 13", and 8-1/2" x 11" R

Stapling capacity: Up to 50

sheets for A4R, B5R, and 8-1/2"

x 11"R, and up to 25 sheets for

other sizes

Centre left two

positions of

printouts

Same as above

Lower left corner

of printouts

Available paper sizes: A3, B4,

A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-

1/2" x 13", and 8-1/2" x 11" R

Stapling capacity: Up to 50

sheets for A4R, B5R, and 8-1/2"

x 11"R, and up to 25 sheets for

other sizes

Saddle stitch on

centrefold line.

Paper in the portrait direction

cannot be saddle stitched.

Available paper sizes: A3,

B4, A4R, 11" x 17", and 8-

1/2" x 11"R

Stapling capacity: Up to 10

sheets for any sizes

Q Original orientation when using the staple sort or punch function

When using the staple sort or punch function, the original must be placed in the following orientations to enable

stapling or punching in the desired position on the paper.

Staple sort

Document feeder

Punch

Document feeder

Document glass

3-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

■ Saddle stitch function

The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place two

staples for centreline binding of prints or copies and fold

them along the centreline.

■ Hole punching (only if a punch module is

installed)

{Original 1}

If the saddle stitch finisher is equipped with a hole punch

module, printed paper can be hole punched and delivered

to the offset tray. Saddle stitching and hole punching

cannot be selected at the same time. The automatic image

rotation will not function when the hole punching function

is used.

{Punch positions}

Two or three holes can be punched depending on the

paper size. (See paper sizes for hole punching on page

4-4.)

{Original 2}

{Punch positions}

If the punching function is enabled for a paper size that

cannot be punched, the paper will be output without being

punched. (For paper sizes that can be punched, see the

specifications on page 3-15.) When using the punching

function in copy mode, place the original with the top edge

toward the back of the machine. If the original is not placed

in this orientation, punching will not take place at the

correct positions.

3-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

Using the saddle stitch finisher

When [OUTPUT] is selected on the main screen of copy mode, a screen for making selections for sort, group, staple

sort, saddle stitch, punch and exit tray will appear.

(1)(2)(3)

(4)(5)

(6)

(7)

OUTPUT

SORT

OFFSET

TRAY

CENTRE

TRAY

STAPLE

SORT

SADDLE

STITCH

PUNCH

GROUP

OFFSET

(8)

(9)

(10)

(1) [GROUP] key (See page 3-15.)

(6) [CENTRE TRAY] key

When Group is selected, all copies of the same

original will be grouped.

If the centre tray is selected, output paper will be

delivered to the exit tray.

(2) [STAPLE SORT] key (See page 3-16.)

(7) [OK] key

When Staple Sort is selected, sorted sets will be

stapled and delivered to the offset tray. (They will

not be offset stacked.)

Press to close the [OUTPUT] screen and to return

to the main screen.

(8) [OFFSET] key (See page 3-15.)

(3) [SORT] key (See page 3-15.)

When the offset tray is selected, copies will be

delivered to the offset tray. When staple sort is

selected, the offset tray will be automatically

cancelled.

When Sort is selected, sets of copies will be

sequentially delivered.

(4) Icon display

(9) [SADDLE STITCH] key (See page 3-17.)

An icon representing a selected function (sort,

staple sort or group saddle stitch) is displayed.

When saddle stitching is selected, the copies will

be stapled at the centre and delivered to the saddle

stitch tray.

(5) [OFFSET TRAY] key

If Offset is checked, the offset will be enabled. If not

checked, the offset will not function. If the staple

sort is selected, the check mark of offset will be

automatically selected.

(10) [PUNCH] key (See page 3-17.)

If the saddle stitch finisher is equipped with a punch

module, printed paper can be hole punched and

delivered to the offset tray.

* As a selection is made, the touch key for the

selection will be highlighted.

3-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal

When the staple cartridge becomes empty or staples become jammed, a message will appear in the message

display of the operation panel.

Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge or remove jammed staples.

■ Staple cartridge replacement

Insert a new staple cartridge into the

staple box.

1 ^{Open the front cover.}

After inserting the staple

cartridge, press down on

the staple box cover to

lock the cartridge in

place.

2 ^{Pull out the stapler section.}

NOTES

● Do not remove the tape from the cartridge before

inserting the staple cartridge into the box.

● Make sure that the staple cartridge is secured

firmly.

● When reinstalling the staple box, push it in until it

clicks into place.

Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction

of the arrow to move the staple unit to the

front.

Remove the tape from the staple cartridge

by pulling it straight.

Turn the roller rotating

knob until the triangle

mark is aligned with the

index.

Rollerrotating

knob A

Staple unit

8 ^{Insert the staple box.}

4 ^{Remove the empty staple box.}

Push the staple box in

until it clicks into place.

Push the stapler section back into the

finisher.

5 ^{Remove the empty staple cartridge.}

Press the lock button to

unlock the staple box

cover and remove the

staple cartridge.

Close the front cover.

NOTE

Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to

ensure that stapling is performed properly.

NOTE

If staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be

removed.

3-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

ꢁ Staple jam removal

Unlatch the saddle stitch finisher and slide

it away from the machine.

If saddle stitch was selected, open the

saddle stitch section cover.

2 ^{Open the front cover.}

6 ^{Remove the misfed paper.}

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Turn roller rotating knob C as shown in the

illustration until the blue indication is

seen.

7 ^{Close the saddle stitch section cover.}

Roller rotating

knob C

Blue

Open the front cover and pull out the

stapler unit.

Remove the paper from the stapler

compiler.

3-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

Return the lever to its original position.

Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction

of the arrow to move the staple unit to the

front.

Turn the roller rotating

knob until the triangle

mark is aligned with the

index.

Rollerrotating

knob A

Staple unit

Reinstall the staple box.

Remove the staple box.

Push the staple box in

until it clicks into place.

Push the stapler section back into the finisher.

Close the front cover.

Raise the lever at the end of the staple box.

Remove the top staple if

it is bent. If bent staples

remain, a staple jam will

occur again.

Push the saddle stitch finisher back against the

16_machine.

NOTE

Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to

ensure that stapling is performed properly.

■ Disposal of hole punch scrap

Unlatch the saddle stitch finisher and slide

it away from the machine.

Return the punch scrap collecting

container to its original position.

Pull out the punch scrap collecting

container and empty it.

Push the saddle stitch finisher back

against the machine.

Empty the punch debris

into a plastic bag or

other

container

for

disposal, taking care not

to spill any of the punch

debris.

3-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher

When a misfeed occurs in the saddle stitch finisher, remove the misfed paper following the procedure below.

Press the detach button and separate the

saddle stitch finisher from the machine.

5 ^{Remove the misfed paper.}

Remove

the

paper

gently, taking care not to

tear it.

6 ^{Close the top cover.}

CAUTION

The saddle stitch finisher and the machine are

connected at the rear. Exercise caution when pulling

them apart.

Remove any misfed paper from the

machine.

Remove any misfed paper from the stapler

compiler.

Remove

the

paper

gently, taking care not to

tear it.

If there was no misfed paper in step 2, pull

roller rotating knob B on the punch unit

toward you and rotate it. (Only when an

optional punch unit is installed.)

Rotating roller rotating

knob B releases the

caught paper.

Roller rotating

Open the cover of the saddle stitch

section.

knob B

4 ^{Open the top cover.}

9 ^{Remove the misfed paper.}

Remove

the

paper

gently, taking care not to

tear it.

3-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

Open the front cover.

Push the saddle stitch finisher back onto the

15_machine.

Rotate roller rotating knob D in the direction of

11_{the arrow.}

Roller rotating knob D

Remove any misfed paper from the saddle

12_{stitch tray.}

Remove

the

paper

gently, taking care not to

tear it.

Close the cover of the saddle stitch section.

Close the front cover.

3-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

Troubleshooting (concerning the saddle stitch finisher)

Check the list below before calling for service.

Problem

Check

Solution or cause

Are any saddle stitch finisher covers open? Close all covers. (See page 3-14.)

The saddle stitch

finisher does not

operate.

Message indicating need to remove paper Remove all remaining paper from the stapler

from the stapler compiler displayed?

compiler referring to step 4 on page 3-20.

Message requesting check for the staple

unit displayed?

Remove jammed staples. (See page 3-20.)

Stapling cannot be

performed (including

saddle stitch).

Replace the staple cartridge. (See page

3-19.) Check that a staple cartridge has been

installed. (See page 3-20.)

Message requesting adding staples

displayed?

Stapling cannot be performed onto different

size paper.

Different size paper included?

Paper heavily curled?

Stapled sets are not

stacked correctly or

some sheets in a set

are not stapled.

Paper may be curled heavily depending on

the paper type and quality. Remove paper

from the paper tray or the bypass tray, turn it

upside down, and load it again.

Punching does not

take place in the

correct positions.*

The punching function is not set for the Check the positions where punching is

correct positions.

possible.

Message requesting check for punch

module displayed?

Dispose of punch scraps. (See page 3-21.)

Stapling cannot be performed onto different

size paper.

Different size paper included?

Cannot be punched.*

Some types and qualities of paper may curl

badly when printed on. Remove the paper

from the tray or bypass tray, turn it around to

reverse the top and bottom, and then place it

back in the tray.

The paper is badly curled and is not

punched.

* When a punch module is installed

3-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Part 2: Copier Operation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER 4

MAKING COPIES

This chapter explains the basic procedures for making copies, including

selection of the copy ratio and other copy settings.

Page

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER...................................................... 4-2

ꢀ

Acceptable originals........................................................................ 4-2

PLACING ORIGINALS............................................................................ 4-3

CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL................................. 4-5

ꢀ

Manually setting the scanning size ................................................. 4-5

STORING, DELETING, AND USING ORIGINAL SIZES ........................ 4-6

ꢀ

Storing or deleting an original size.................................................. 4-6

NORMAL COPYING............................................................................... 4-7

ꢀ

Making copies with the automatic document feeder ....................... 4-7

ꢀ

Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic document feeder.... 4-10

ꢀ

Copying from the document glass................................................... 4-11

ꢀ

Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass.................. 4-13

ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE .....................................................................4-14

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM................................................... 4-15

ꢀ

Automatic selection (auto image).................................................... 4-15

ꢀ

Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom).................................... 4-16

ꢀ

XY ZOOM........................................................................................ 4-18

SPECIAL PAPERS ................................................................................. 4-20

4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER

The automatic document feeder automatically feeds originals into the machine, making continuous copying possible.

In addition, both sides of two-sided sheet originals can be simultaneously scanned. This function is convenient when

you have a large number of original pages to scan.

Acceptable originals

A stack of up to 50 original sheets (30 original sheets* for B4 (8-1/2" x 14") or larger) of the same size paper can be

set in the document feeder tray provided the stack height is within the limit shown below.

A stack of up to 30 mixed size originals can be set if the width of the originals is the same and the stack height is within

the limit shown below. In this case, however, stapling and duplex will not function and some special functions may

not give the expected result.

*1 For paper heavier than 105 g/m (28 lbs.), only a stack of up to 15 sheets can be set. Setting 16 or more sheets

may cause incorrect scanning of original and scanned image may become expanded compared with original

itself.

ꢁ Size and weight of acceptable

ꢁ Total number of originals that can be

originals

set in the document feeder tray

A5 or

5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 6.5 mm or

1/4" (for 50 to 80 g/m or 14 to 21 lbs. paper).

Original size:

A3 or

11" x 17"

6.5 mm or 1/4"

or less

(148 x 210 mm)

Weight (thickness):

(297 x 420 mm)

Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 5.0 mm or

3/16" (for 80 to 128 g/m or 21 to 34 lbs. paper).

5.0 mm or 3/16"

or less

50g/m²or 14 lbs.

128 g/m²or 34 lbs.

g/m²... Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 m²

ꢁ Notes on use of the automatic document feeder

ꢀUse originals within the specified size and weight ranges. Use of originals out of the specified range may cause

an original misfeed.

ꢀBefore loading originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.

ꢀIf originals have damp spots from correction fluid, ink or glue from pasteups, be sure they are dried before they

are fed. If not, the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.

ꢀDo not use the following originals. These originals may cause incorrect original size detection, original

misfeeds, and smudges on copies.

ꢀ

Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink

ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be

damaged, crumpled or folded or have loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them. Originals with

multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper may not feed correctly.

ꢀWhen using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the

punched edge is at a position other than the feed slot.

Hole positions

Hole

positions

Hole positions

4-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PLACING ORIGINALS

ꢁ Using the automatic document

ꢁ Using the document glass

feeder

Open the document cover, make sure that

an original has not been left on the

document glass, and then gently close the

document cover.

Open the document cover, place the

original face down on the document glass,

and then gently close the document cover.

To make a copy of a

small original such as a

postcard,

use

the

[PAPER SELECT] key

to select the desired

paper size.

Original size detector

NOTE

Adjust the original guides to the size of the

originals.

Do not place any objects under the original size

detector, because they may damage it or the original

size may not be detected properly.

Original scale

mark

Original scale

mark

Place the originals face down in the

document feeder tray.

A5 or

5½ x 8½

A4R or 8½x11R

B4 or

8½x14

A4 or 8½x11 A3 or 11x17

Place the originals face

down.

Insert the originals all

ꢀAlign the corner of the original with the tip of the

arrow mark on the document glass scale.

the

way

into

the

document feeder. The

stack height must not be

higher than the indicator

ꢀPlace the original in the appropriate position for its

size as shown above.

line (maximum of 50 pages).

NOTE

Original size detection function

One of the four groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size

detection function. The factory default setting is "AB-1 (INCH-1)". The setting can be changed using

"ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTOR SETTING" in the key operator programs.

Detectable original sizes

Group

Document feeder tray (for automatic document feeder)

Document glass

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11",

8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

INCH-1

INCH-2

AB-1

Document glass + A3, A4

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11",

8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Document glass + A3, A4

Document glass + 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11",

216x330

A3, A4, A4R, A5,B4, B5, B5R

Document glass + 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11",

AB-2

A3, A4, A4R, A5,B5, B5R, 216x330

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PLACING ORIGINALS

ꢁ Standard original placement orientations

[Example 1]

Document feeder tray

Document glass

Place

originals

the

document feeder tray or on

the document glass so that

the top and bottom of the

original is positioned as

shown in the illustration. If not,

staples will be incorrectly

positioned and some special

features may not give the

expected result.

Top

Bottom

[Example 2]

Top

Bottom

ꢁ Automatic copy image rotation - rotation copying

If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90°

and copied. (When an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) If a function is selected that is not suitable

for rotation, such as enlarging the copy to greater than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size or staple sorting with the saddle

stitch finisher, rotation will not be possible.

[Example]

Orientation of original

Orientation of paper

Copy after rotation

Face down

ꢀThis function operates in both the auto paper select or auto image mode. ("Rotation copy setting" can be

disabled with a key operator program. See page 14 of the key operator's guide.)

4-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED

ORIGINAL

If the placed original is a standard size, the size will be automatically

detected (automatic original detection function) and displayed in the touch

panel. Make sure that the correct size has been detected.

(A) :The original size is displayed.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

(B) :[AUTO] appears when the automatic original detection function is

operating.

AUTO

EXPOSURE

If you have loaded a non-standard size original or wish to change the

scanning size, you can follow the steps below to manually set the original

scanning size. (For the standard sizes, see "Original size detection

function" on page 4-3.)

(A)

(B)

NOTE

If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes), the closest standard size may be displayed,

or the original size may not appear at all.

If "CANCEL DETECTION AT DOCUMENT GLASS" is enabled in the key operator programs (see page 11 of

the key operator’s guide), automatic original detection at the document glass will not operate. In this case,

follow the steps below to manually set the original scanning size.

Manually setting the scanning size

If you load an original that is not a standard size (such as an AB size), or if the size is not detected correctly, you must

touch the [ORIGINAL] key and set the original size manually. Perform the following steps after placing the document

in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.

If a non-standard size original is placed in

the document feeder or on the document

glass, touch the [SIZE INPUT] tab and then

enter the X (width) and Y (length)

1 ^{Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.}

dimensions of the original.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

X is initially selected.

Enter the X dimension

(64

432)

297)

(width) and then touch

the Y( ) key and enter

the Y dimension (length).

X can be from 64 to 432

mm, and Y can be from

64 to 297 mm.

AUTO

EXPOSURE

420

297

(64

STANDARD SIZE

SIZE INPUT

2 ^{Touch the desired original size key.}

[AUTO] is no longer

highlighted. [MANUAL]

and the original size key

A4R

If you frequently use originals that are the same

non-standard size, you can store the size as

explained in "STORING, DELETING, AND USING

ORIGINAL SIZES" on the following page. This will

save you the trouble of manually entering the size

each time you use that original size.

A5R

INCH

you

touched

are

B5R

highlighted.

STANDARD SIZE

SIZE INPUT

3 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

If you wish to select an INCH size, touch

the [AB/INCH] key and then touch the

desired original size key.

You will return to the initial screen.

The selected original size appears in the

top half of the [ORIGINAL] key.

[INCH] is highlighted

₂X

8 13

5₂8₂

and INCH size keys are

displayed. To return to

the inch palette, touch

the [AB/INCH] key once

again.

5₂8₂R

8₂14

8₂x11

₂X

1117

INCH

ORIGINAL

8₂11R

STANDARD SIZE

SIZE INPUT

AUTO

EXPOSURE

4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STORING, DELETING, AND USING

ORIGINAL SIZES

Up to 9 special original sizes can be stored. Stored sizes can be easily called up and are not erased if the power is

turned off. Storing a frequently used original size saves you the trouble of manually setting the size each time you

copy that size of document.

O To cancel an original size storing, using, or deleting operation, press the [CA] key or touch the [ORIGINAL] key

on the screen.

Storing or deleting an original size

Enter the X (width) and Y (length)

1 ^{Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.}

dimensions of the original with the

keys.

AUTO

CANCEL

(width) is initially

ORIGINAL

selected.

(64

432)

297)

Enter X and then touch

the ( ) key to enter Y.

A width of 64 to 432 mm

can be entered in X, and

a length of 64 to 297 mm

420

297

AUTO

EXPOSURE

(64

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

2 ^{Touch the [CUSTOM SIZE] key.}

can be entered in Y.

AUTO

EXPOSURE

6 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

MANUAL

INCH

AUTO

The original size entered in step 5 is stored in the

key selected in step 4.

PAPER SE

CUSTOM

SIZE

100%

E INPUT

COPY RAT

To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

When you touch a key that shows an

original size in step 4, a message screen

appears that contains the keys [CANCEL],

[DELETE], and [AMEND].

3 ^{Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.}

AUTO

OTo cancel the procedure, touch the

MANUA

[CANCEL] key.

OTo delete the selected original size, touch the

[DELETE] key.

CUSTO

SIZE

STORE/DELETE

OTo change the original size stored in the key,

touch the [AMEND] key. The screen of step 5

will appear to let you change the size.

Touch the original size key (

you wish to store or delete.

) that

8 ^{To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key.}

To store an original size,

touch a key that does not

X68 Y78

Q USING A STORED ORIGINAL SIZE

show a size (

Follow steps 1 to 2 of "STORING OR

DELETING AN ORIGINAL SIZE".

Keys that already have

an original size stored

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

will show the stored size

Touch the original size key that you wish

to use.

X68 Y78

(

To delete or change a stored size, touch the key

that shows the size that you wish to delete or

change.

X68 Y78

OIf you are storing an original size, go to step 5.

OTo delete or change an original size, go to

step 7.

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

3 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

The stored original size is called up.

4-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NORMAL COPYING

This section describes the normal copying procedure.

Making copies with the automatic document feeder

ꢁ 1-sided copies of 1-sided originals

Original

Copy

Place the originals in the document feeder

tray. (pages 4-3 to 4-6)

5 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

Make sure that paper of the same size as

the originals is automatically selected*.

Make sure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy

mode is selected.

AUTO

The selected tray will be

EXPOSURE

highlighted

the

The one-sided to one-

ORIGINAL

message "LOAD xxxxxx

PAPER." will appear. If

the message appears,

load paper in a paper

tray with paper of the

required size.

sided mode is selected

when no icon for a two-

sided mode appears in

the dashed area on the

display. If the 1-sided to

1-sided copy mode is

AUTO A4

PAPER SELECT

100%

A4R

already selected, steps 3 to 5 are not needed.

Even if the message above appears, copying can

be performed onto the currently selected paper.

3 ^{Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.}

*The following requirements must be satisfied.

Originals of a standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,

B5R or A5 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-

1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2R")) are set and the

auto paper select function is enabled.

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

If originals of a size other

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

than the sizes above are

1. A4

2. A3

3. A3

PLAIN

to be copied, manually

select the desired paper

size by touching the

[PAPER SELECT] key

and then touching the

PLAIN

4 ^{Touch the [1-sided to 1-sided copy] key.}

4. A4

Touch the [1-sided to 1-

sided copy] key.

desired paper size selection key.

The selected key will be highlighted and the paper

selection screen will close. To close the paper

selection screen without making a selection, touch

the [PAPER SELECT] key.

4-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NORMAL COPYING

7 ^{Select the desired output mode (page 4-9).}10^{Press the [START] key.}

The sort mode is the

default mode.

To select the group

If the [C] key is pressed

while originals are being

scanned, scanning will

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

mode,

touch

the

stop. If copying had

[OUTPUT] key, then

touch the [GROUP] key

on the output setting

already started, copying

and scanning will stop

after the original in

FILE

screen, and then touch the [OK] key on the setting

screen.

progress is output to the original exit area. In these

cases the copy quantity will be reset to "0".

Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

NOTES

● The 1-sided to 1-sided copying mode is set as the

default in the initial settings. If the default setting

has not been changed using the "Initial status

settings" program (key operator program), steps 3

to 5 on page 4-7 can be omitted.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0". Use the [C] (clear)

To cancel copying...

key to cancel an entry if

a mistake has been made.

To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA]

key. A confirmation message will appear. Touch

the [YES] key to cancel copying.

If needed, touch the [FILE] key or the

[QUICK FILE] key*.

* Can only be used on the d-Copia 3501 / 4501,

or when the document filling function has been

added.

Either key can be

touched to store the

FILE

scanned

document

image on the machine's

hard disk. The stored

image can be re-used

later.

QUICK FILE

For more information on this function, see

"Document filing function" in chapter 7.

If the [FILE] key is greyed out, only the [QUICK

FILE] key can be selected.

When you touch the [QUICK FILE] key, a message

asking you to confirm the save will appear. Touch

the [OK] key in the message screen and go to the

next step.

If you wish to cancel the save, touch the [QUICK

FILE] key after touching the [OK] key so that the

[QUICK FILE] key is no longer highlighted.

4-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NORMAL COPYING

ꢁ Copy output (sort and group)

Example: Making five sets or five copies each of three originals

ꢀ Sorting copies into sets

Original

Five sets of copies

OUTPUT

SORT

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

GROUP

Press the [START]

key

Touch the

[OUTPUT] key

Touch the

[SORT] key

Set the

number of

copies (5)

When using the automatic document feeder, sorting is

automatically selected when the original is placed in the

document feeder.

ꢀ Grouping copies by page

Original

5 copies per page

OUTPUT

SORT

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

GROUP

Press the [START]

key

Touch the

[OUTPUT] key

Touch

[GROUP] key

the

Set the

number of

copies (5)

"Group" is automatically selected when the

original is placed on the document glass.

ꢁ Selecting the output tray (when an optional finisher or saddle stitch finisher is

installed)

When the [OFFSET TRAY] key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the offset tray of the finisher or

saddle stitch finisher. When the "CENTRE TRAY" key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the centre

tray. Touch the appropriate key to select the desired output tray.

OUTPUT

SORT

OFFSET

TRAY

CENTRE

TRAY

STAPLE

SORT

SADDLE

STITCH

PUNCH

GROUP

OFFSET

This screen appears when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.

The screen that appears when a finisher is installed is slightly different.

4-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NORMAL COPYING

Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic

document feeder

When the optional duplex module is installed, the following automatic two-sided copying can be performed. The

paper is automatically turned over during copying, allowing two-sided copies to be made with ease.

Original

Copy

1. Automatic two-sided copying from one-sided

originals

2. Automatic two-sided copying from two-sided

originals

3. Automatic one-sided copying from two-sided

originals

Place the originals in the document feeder

tray. (pages 4-3 to 4-6)

3 ^{Select the desired copy mode.}

The display will vary

DED COPY

depending

equipment installed.

the

BIND

CHA

If a copy key is touched for a mode that cannot

be selected, a double beep will sound.

2 ^{Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.}

Example of a

landscape-oriented

original

Example of a

portrait-oriented

original

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

When making automatic two-sided copies of a

one-sided A3 (11" x 17") or B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size

portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top

and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original,

touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.

4 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

BINDING

Perform steps 6 through 10 on pages 4-7 and 4-8.

4-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NORMAL COPYING

Copying from the document glass

When copying originals which cannot be fed from the automatic document feeder such as thick originals, open the

document cover and copy the originals from the document glass.

ꢁ 1-sided copies of 1-sided originals

Original

Copy

Place the original on the document glass.

(pages 4-3 to 4-6)

Ensure that paper of the same size as the

original is automatically selected*.

AUTO

The selected tray will be

EXPOSURE

highlighted

the

message "LOAD xxxxxx

PAPER." will appear. If

the message appears,

load paper in a paper

tray with paper of the

AUTO

PAPER SELECT

100%

COPY RATIO

required size.

Original scale

mark

Original scale

mark

Even if the message above is displayed, copying

can be performed onto the currently selected

paper.

* The following requirements must be satisfied.

Originals of a standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,

B5R or A5 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-

1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)) are set and the

auto paper select function is enabled.

A5 or

5½ x 8½

A4R or 8½x11R

B4 or

8½x14

A4 or 8½x11 A3 or 11x17

If originals of a size other

than the sizes above are

to be copied, manually

select the desired paper

size by touching the

[PAPER SELECT] key

and then touching the

ꢀAlign the corner of the original with the tip of the

arrow mark on the document glass scale.

ꢀPlace the original in the appropriate position for its

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

1. A4

2. A3

3. A3

PLAIN

size as shown above.

PLAIN

4. A4

Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy

mode is selected.

desired paper size selection key.

The selected key will be highlighted and the paper

selection screen will close. To close the paper

selection screen without making a selection, touch

the [PAPER SELECT] key.

The one-sided to one-

ORIGINAL

sided mode is selected

when no icon for a two-

sided mode appears in

the dashed area on the

display. If an icon

appears, perform steps

A4R

3 to 5 on page 4-7 and then go to step 3.

4-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NORMAL COPYING

Select the desired output mode. (page 4-

9.)

7 ^{Press the [START] key.}

Replace the original with

Group mode is the

default mode.

the next original and

press the [START] key.

Repeat this operation

until all originals have

been scanned.

2-SIDED COPY

To select sort mode,

touch the [OUTPUT]

key, touch the [SORT]

OUTPUT

key in the screen that

appears, and then touch

the [OK] key.

FILE

If you selected "Sort" for

the output mode in step 4 and pressed the

[START] key, it is necessary to touch the [READ-

END] key.

Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

8 ^{Touch the [READ-END] key.}

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0".

PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].

WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].

READ-END

Use the [C] (clear) key to

cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.

If needed, touch the [FILE] key or the

[QUICK FILE] key*.

To cancel copying...

To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA] key.

A confirmation message will appear. Touch the

[YES] key to cancel copying.

* Can only be used on the d-Copia 3501 / 4501

version, or when the document filling function has

been added.

Either key can be

touched to store the

FILE

scanned

document

image on the machine's

hard disk. The stored

image can be re-used

later.

QUICK FILE

For more information on this function, see

"Document filing function" in chapter 7.

If the [FILE] key is greyed out, only the [QUICK

FILE] key can be selected.

When you touch the [QUICK FILE] key, a message

asking you to confirm the save will appear. Touch

the [OK] key in the message screen and go to the

next step.

If you wish to cancel the save, touch the [QUICK

FILE] key after touching the [OK] key so that the

[QUICK FILE] key is no longer highlighted.

4-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NORMAL COPYING

Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass

When the optional duplex module is installed, the following automatic two-sided copying can be performed. The

paper is automatically turned over during copying, allowing two-sided copies to be made with ease.

Original

Copy

Place the original on the document glass.

(pages 4-3 to 4-6)

3 ^{Touch the [1-sided to 2-sided copy] key.}

Example of a

landscape-oriented

original

Example of a

portrait-oriented

original

Original scale

mark

Original scale

mark

A5 or

5½ x 8½

A4R or 8½x11R

B4 or

8½x14

A4 or 8½x11 A3 or 11x17

ꢀAlign the corner of the original with the tip of the

arrow mark on the document glass scale.

ꢀPlace the original in the appropriate position for its

When making automatic two-sided copies of a

one-sided A3 (11" x 17") or B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size

portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top

and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original,

touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.

size as shown above.

4 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

2 ^{Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.}

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

BINDING

Perform steps 3 to 8 on pages 4-11 and 4-12.

4-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE

Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original to be copied. The selections are AUTO, TEXT, TEXT/PHOTO

and PHOTO.

ꢁ Automatic exposure adjustment

AUTO

ORIGINAL

The default exposure

setting is "AUTO", which

automatically

adjusts

AUTO

EXPOSURE

the exposure for the

original. To select the

exposure mode, or to

manually adjust the

AUTO A4

PAPER SELECT

exposure level, follow the steps below.

ꢁ Selecting the exposure mode and manually adjusting the exposure level

1 ^{Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.}

3 ^{Adjust the exposure level.}

Touch the

make darker copies.

Touch the key to

make lighter copies.

key to

AUTO

MANUAL

ORIGINAL

AUTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO A4

PAPER SELECT

NOTE

Select [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO] or [PHOTO]

as appropriate for the original to be

Exposure levels in TEXT mode

copied.

1 to 2: Dark originals such as newspaper

Normal density originals

AUTO

ORIGINAL

IMAGE TYPE

4 to 5: Originals written with pencils or light colour

characters

AUTO

MANUAL

TEXT

TEXT/PHOTO

PHOTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO A4

PAPER SELECT

100%

COPY RATIO

About the steps that follow

To select [TEXT], touch the [AUTO MANUAL]

key so that [MANUAL] is selected.

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

Exposure modes selection

TEXT:

This mode is useful for producing

dark text copies with minimum

background.

TEXT/PHOTO: This provides the best balance for

copying an original which contains

both text and photos. This mode is

also useful for copying printed

photographs.

NOTES

ꢀ To return to the automatic exposure mode, touch

the [AUTO / MANUAL] key to highlight [AUTO],

and then touch the [OK] key.

ꢀ The exposure level used in automatic exposure

mode can be adjusted in the key operator

programs. See "Exposure adjustment" on page 14

of the key operator's guide)

PHOTO:

This mode provides the best copies

of photographs with fine details.

4-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

Reduction and enlargement ratios can be selected automatically or manually.

● Automatic selection: Auto image (see below)

● Manual selection: Preset copy ratios/zoom (see page 4-16)

Automatic selection (auto image)

The reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically based on the original size and the selected paper size.

Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

NOTE

If the message "ROTATE ORIGINAL FROM

" is displayed, change the orientation of the

original as indicated in the message. When the

message above is displayed, copying can be done

without changing the orientation, but the image will

not fit the paper correctly.

The detected original size will be displayed.

NOTE

Automatic ratio adjustment can only be used for the

following original and paper sizes. It cannot be used

for other sizes. However, in the case of non-standard

original and paper sizes, the sizes can be entered to

make automatic ratio adjustment possible for those

sizes.

Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0".

Original sizes:Standard sizes (see "Original size

detection function" on page 4-3.)

Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R

(11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-

1/2" x 11"R, or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)

Use the [C] (clear) key to

cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.

If needed, touch the [FILE] key or the

[QUICK FILE] key*.

Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then

select the desired paper size.

* Can only be used on the d-Copia 315 Network version,

or when the document filling function has been added.

Either key can be touched

The selected paper size

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

key is highlighted and

the paper selection

screen closes.

1. A4

PLAIN

to store the scanned

document image on the

2. B4

3. B4

4. A4

FILE

PLAIN

machine's hard disk. The

stored image can be re-

QUICK FILE

used later.

NOTE

For more information on

this function, see "Document filing function" in

chapter 7.

If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray,

load paper of the required size in a paper tray. (See

"Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-5.)

If the [FILE] key is greyed out, only the [QUICK

FILE] key can be selected. When you touch the

[QUICK FILE] key, a message asking you to

confirm the save will appear. Touch the [OK] key in

the message screen and go to the next step.

If you wish to cancel the save, touch the [QUICK

FILE] key after touching the [OK] key so that the

[QUICK FILE] key is no longer highlighted.

3 ^{Touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key.}

5.8₂x11

AUTO

IMAGE

6 ^{Press the [START] key.}

If you placed the original

The [AUTO IMAGE] key

PAPER SELECT

on the document glass,

set the output mode to

"Sort", and pressed the

[START] key, you must

touch the [READ-END]

will be highlighted and

the best reduction or

enlargement ratio for the

original size and the

selected paper size will

122%

COPY RATIO

key after all pages of the

selected

and

original have been scanned. (Step 8 on page 4-12)

displayed in the copy ratio display.

To cancel the auto image mode, touch the [CA] key.

4-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom)

Preset ratios (maximum 400%, minimum 25%) can be selected with the enlargement and reduction keys. In addition,

the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.

<The key operator program on page 14 of the key operator's guide can be used to set two additional enlargement

ratios and two additional reduction ratios.>

Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

Use the reduction, enlargement, and

[ZOOM] keys on the touch panel to set the

desired copy ratio.

NOTE

When the original is placed in the document feeder,

the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%.

ZOOM

2 ^{Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.}

XY ZOOM

AUTO A4

PAPER SELECT

Zoom ratios: Any ratio

from 25% to 400% can

be set in 1% increments.

100%

COPY RATIO

ZOOM

Touch the [

increase the ratio, or the

] key to decrease

] key to

[

XY ZOOM

the ratio. (If you continue

] key, the ratio will change

automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will

change rapidly.)

Use the [MENU] key to select menu " " or

menu " " for copy ratio selection.

to touch the [

]/[

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

NOTES

ꢀ Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the

approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to

] key to decrease the

AUTO

ORIGINAL

ZOOM

AUTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO

increase the ratio or the [

ratio.

PAPER SELECT

AUTO

IMAGE

XY ZOOM

COPY RATIO

ꢀ Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key

is continuously touched can be disabled in the key

operator programs (see "Key operation setting

(prohibit key repeat)" on page 10 of the key

operator’s guide).

ꢀ If the message "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN COPY

PAPER." appears when a ratio is selected, the

image may not fit on the copy paper.

ꢀA.Preset reduction copy ratios are:

70%, 81% and 86% (for the AB system).

77% and 64% (for the inch system).

ꢀ

B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are:

115%, 122% and 141% (for the AB system).

121% and 129% (for the inch system).

ꢀ To set the horizontal and vertical copy ratios

separately, use the XY ZOOM feature. See page

4-18.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

ZOOM

AUTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO

PAPER SELECT

5 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

AUTO

IMAGE

XY ZOOM

COPY RATIO

AUTO

ꢀA.Preset reduction copy ratios are:

50% and 25%.

ꢀB.Preset enlargement copy ratios are:

200% and 400%.

ORIGINAL

AUTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO

PAPER SELECT

AUTO

IMAGE

COPY RATIO

(The custom ratios set by the key operator appear

in ratio menu 2.)

4-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

Make sure that an appropriate paper size

has been selected based on the selected

If needed, touch the [FILE] key or the

[QUICK FILE] key*.

ratio.

* Can only be used on the d-Copia 315 Network

version, or when the document filling function has

been added.

ORIGINAL

AUTO

EXPOSURE

Auto paper select display

Either key can be

AUTO

touched to store the

PAPER SELECT

FILE

scanned

document

64%

image on the machine's

hard disk. The stored

image can be re-used

later.

COPY RATIO

QUICK FILE

NOTE

For more information on this function, see

"Document filing function" in chapter 7.

If the [FILE] key is greyed out, only the [QUICK

FILE] key can be selected.

If the auto paper select display does not appear, a

tray with the correct size of paper for the selected

ratio will not be automatically selected.

When you touch the [QUICK FILE] key, a message

asking you to confirm the save will appear. Touch

the [OK] key in the message screen and go to the

next step.

Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

If you wish to cancel the save, touch the [QUICK

FILE] key after touching the [OK] key so that the

[QUICK FILE] key is no longer highlighted.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0".

9 ^{Press the [START] key.}

If you placed the original

on the document glass,

set the output to "Sort",

Use the [C] (clear) key to

cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.

and

pressed

the

[START] key, you must

touch the [READ-END]

key after all pages of the

original have been scanned. (Step 8 on page 4-12)

To return the ratio to 100%

To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [COPY

RATIO] key to display the ratio menu and then touch

the [100%] key. (Steps 2 and 3 on page 4-16.)

4-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

XY ZOOM

The XY ZOOM feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately. The ratios can set

from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.

Example: Selecting 100% for the length and 50% for the width

Copy

Original

Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

Use the reduction, enlargement, and

ZOOM ([

], [

]) keys to change the

copy ratio in the horizontal (X) direction.

Y 10 A fixed ratio key will not

64%

50%

NOTE

become

highlighted

ZOOM

When the original is placed in the document feeder,

the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%.

when touched.

2 ^{Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.}

XY ZOOM

AUTO A4

PAPER SELECT

Zoom ratios: Any ratio

from 25% to 400% can

be set in 1% increments.

100%

COPY RATIO

100

Touch the [

increase the ratio, or the

] key to decrease

] key to

ZOOM

[

the ratio. (If you continue

] key, the ratio will change

automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will

change rapidly.)

to touch the [

]/[

3 ^{Touch the [XY ZOOM] key.}

NOTES

ꢀ Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the

approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to

] key to decrease the

XY ZOOM

increase the ratio or the [

ratio.

ꢀ Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key

is continuously touched can be disabled in the key

operator programs (see "Key operation setting

(prohibit key repeat)” on page 10 of the key

operator’s guide).

4 ^{Touch the [X] key.}

The initial state of the [X]

key is selected

100

(highlighted), so this

step normally is not

necessary. Touch the

[X] key only if it is not

highlighted yet.

6 ^{Touch the [Y] key.}

ZOOM

Y 100

ZOOM

4-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

Use the reduction, enlargement, and

Select any desired copy settings such as

the exposure or number of copies, and

then press the [START] key.

ZOOM ([

], [

]) keys to change the

copy ratio in the vertical (Y) direction.

A fixed ratio key will not

70%

become

highlighted

when touched.

64%

50%

ZOOM

The zoom keys can be

used to change the ratio

from 25% to 400% in

increments of 1%.

ZOOM

To cancel an X or Y zoom setting...

Touch the [XY ZOOM] key or the [CANCEL] key in

the ratio selection screen (step 3 or 7 on page 4-18).

If needed, you can touch

the [X] key once again to

readjust the X zoom.

XY ZOOM

CANCEL

8 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

141%

200%

100%

400%

If needed, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key

and select the paper size.

If the AUTO PAPER

SELECT mode is on, the

appropriate copy paper

size will have been

automatically selected

based on the original

size and selected copy

ratios.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

PLAIN

AUTO

EXPOSURE

PAPER SELECT

X-50% Y-70%

COPY RATIO

PLAIN

4-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL PAPERS

The tray 2 and the bypass tray on the optional duplex module with bypass tray can be used to make copies on

transparencies, postcards, label sheets, envelopes* , and plain paper.

*1 Envelopes can be placed in the tray 2.

Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

5 ^{Select the bypass tray.}

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY

PLAIN

Select any desired copy settings such as

the exposure or number of copies, and

then press the [START] key.

2 ^{Load the special paper in the bypass tray.}

Place the paper with the

printed side face down.

See page 2-3 for the

specifications of paper

that can be used in the

bypass tray.

When copying from the

document glass in the

sort mode using the

[START] key, touch the

[READ-END] key after

all originals have been

scanned (step 8 on page

4-12).

For the paper loading

instructions,

see

"Loading paper in the

bypass tray" (page 3-3).

3 ^{Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.}

AUTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO A4

PAPER SELECT

100%

Set the type and size of paper loaded in the

bypass tray.

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY

(1)The (X) key shows

the currently selected

paper type.

PLAIN

(2)The (Y) key shows

the size of paper

loaded in the bypass

tray.

(X)

(Y)

(3)To change the displayed paper type, touch the

(X) key before touching the (Y) key. When

loading paper, if you changed the paper size

from an AB size to an inch size (or from an inch

size to an AB size), or if you changed the paper

type, be sure to change the paper type and size

settings as explained in steps 5 to 6 on page 2-

5, and steps 7 to 10 on page 2-6.

4-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER 5

CONVENIENT COPY

FUNCTIONS

This chapter explains special-purpose functions, storing of copy

settings, and other convenient functions. Please select and read

sections of this chapter as needed.

Page

SPECIAL MODES................................................................................... 5-2

ꢀ

General procedure for using special functions................................ 5-2

ꢀ

Margin shift...................................................................................... 5-3

ꢀ

Erase............................................................................................... 5-4

ꢀ

Dual page copy ............................................................................... 5-5

ꢀ

Pamphlet copy ................................................................................ 5-6

ꢀ

Job build.......................................................................................... 5-8

ꢀ

Tandem copy .................................................................................. 5-9

ꢀ

Covers/inserts ................................................................................. 5-11

ꢀ

Transparency film with insert sheets............................................... 5-22

ꢀ

Multi shot......................................................................................... 5-23

ꢀ

Book copy ....................................................................................... 5-25

ꢀ

Card shot......................................................................................... 5-26

ꢀ

Mirror image.................................................................................... 5-28

ꢀ

B/W reverse .................................................................................... 5-28

ꢀ

Print menu....................................................................................... 5-29

STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS......................... 5-41

ꢀ

Storing a job program...................................................................... 5-41

ꢀ

Calling up a job program................................................................. 5-42

ꢀ

Deleting a stored job program......................................................... 5-42

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN.............................................................. 5-43

5-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen of copy mode to open the special modes screen. The following

functions can be selected in the special modes screen.

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key

in the main screen.

(1)

(2)

(3)

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

1/3

SPECIAL MODES

AUTO

ORIGINAL

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

ORIGINAL

DUAL PAGE

AUTO

EXPOSURE

MARGIN SHIFT

PAMPHLET COPY

ERASE

COPY

OUTPUT

AUTO

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

PAPER

FILE

100%

COPY RATIO

QUICK FILE

(4)

(5)

(6) (7) (8)

(1) Margin shift (page 5-3)

(2) Erase (page 5-4)

(7) [OK] key on the special modes screen

Touch the [OK] key to return to the main screen of

copy mode.

(3) Dual page copy (page 5-5)

(4) Pamphlet copy (page 5-6)

(5) Job build (page 5-8)

(8)

key

Touch these keys to change the special modes

screen.

(6) Tandem copy (page 5-9)

There are three special modes screens.

Touch the key to change to the other two screens.

ꢀThe following special functions can be selected in the 2nd screen (2/3).

Covers/inserts (page 5-11)

Transparency inserts (page 5-22)

Multi shot (page 5-23)

Book copy (page 5-25)

Card shot (page 5-26)

Mirror image (page 5-28)

ꢀThe following special functions can be selected in the 3rd screen (3/3).

B/W reverse (page 5-28)

Print menu (page 5-29)

General procedure for using special functions

1 ^{Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.}

To select a special function in one of the other two

screens, use the

screen.

keys to change the

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

Setting procedures for modes requiring setting

screens start on the next page.

The dual page copy, job build, tandem copy,

mirror image and B/W reverse functions do not

require setting screens.

Touch the key for the desired special

mode.

Example:

SPECIAL MODES

Selecting the margin

shift function

MARGIN SHIFT

PAMPHLET COPY

ERASE

JOB

BUILD

5-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Margin shift

The margin shift function will automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 10 mm (1/2") in

its initial setting.

This function is convenient when stapling or binding copies with a string.

NOTES

ꢀ The initial setting for the margin width can be changed in the key operator programs to any value from 0 to 20

mm (0 to 1"). (Page 15 of the Key operator's guide)

ꢀ When margin shift is selected, rotating copying will not operate even if the condition for rotate copying is met.

One-sided copying

ꢀThe shift direction can be selected from right or left

Image shifted

to the right

Image shifted

to the left

shift as shown in the illustration.

Original

Margin

Two-sided copying

Original

Image shifted

to the right

Image shifted

to the left

Margin

Set the shift amount as needed and touch

the [OK] key.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

Use the

keys to set the shift

amount. The shift

amount can be set from

0 to 20 mm in 1 mm (0"

to 1" in 1/8") increments.

and the

CANCEL

SIDE 1

SIDE 2

Touch the [MARGIN SHIFT] key on the

special modes screen.

(0 20)

The margin shift setting

SPECIAL MODES

screen will appear.

The margin shift icon

MARGIN SHIFT

ERASE

(

) will also appear in

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

JOB

BUILD

the upper left of the

screen to indicate that

the function is turned on.

PAMPHLET COPY

About the steps that follow

2 ^{Select the shift direction.}

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

Touch a shift direction

key to select right or left.

The selected key will be

highlighted.

RIGHT

LEFT

To cancel the margin shift function, touch the

[CANCEL] key on the margin shift setting screen.

5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Erase

The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies produced when copying thick originals or books. The

erase modes that can be selected are shown below. The erase width is approximately 10 mm (1/2") in it's initial

setting.

NOTE

The initial setting for the erasure width can be changed in the key operator programs to any value from 0 to 20 mm

(0 to 1"). (Page 15 of the Key operator's guide)

Original

Copy

EDGE ERASE

Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of

copies caused when heavy paper or a book is used

as an original.

CENTRE ERASE

Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings

of bound documents.

EDGE + CENTRE ERASE

Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies

and eliminates the shadow at the centre of copies.

Adjust the amount of erase and touch the

[OK] key.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

Use the

and

keys

CANCEL

EDGE

to set the erase width to

any value from 0 to 10

mm in 1 mm increments

(0" to 1" in increments of

1/8").

Touch the [ERASE] key on the special

modes screen.

(0 20)

The erase setting screen

MODES

will appear.

DUAL

RGIN SHIFT

PHLET COPY

ERASE

The erase icon ( ) will

also appear in the upper

left of the screen to

indicate that the function

is turned on.

JOB

BUILD

TAN

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

2 ^{Select the desired erase mode.}

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

Select one of the three

erase modes. The

ERASE

EDGE

ERASE

CENTRE

ERASE

EDGE+CENTRE

ERASE

selected key will be

highlighted.

NOTE

When erase is used, edge erase takes place at the

edges of the original image. If you also use a ratio

setting, the edge erase width will change according

to the set ratio.

To cancel the erase function, touch the [CANCEL]

key on the erase setting screen (step3).

5-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Dual page copy

The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two documents placed side by side on the document glass.

This function is especially useful when copying books and other bound documents.

[Example] Copying right and left pages of a book

Book original

Dual page copy

ꢀThe dual page copy function can be used only

when copying from the document glass. The

automatic document feeder cannot be used with

this function.

ꢀOnly A4 (8-1/2" x 11") paper can be used.

Ensure that 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size paper is

selected.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

AUTO

EXPOSURE

If A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size

paper is not selected,

touch the [PAPER

SELECT] key to select

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size

paper.

AUTO

Touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the

special modes screen.

PAPER SELECT

The

[DUAL

PAGE

100%

COPY RATIO

COPY] key will be

highlighted to indicate

that the function is

turned on, and the dual

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

RASE

JOB

TANDEM

COPY

BUILD

About the steps that follow

page copy icon (

appear in the upper left

of the screen.

) will

For two-sided copying, follow steps 2 through 4

on page 4-13 and then follow steps 4 through 7

on page 4-12.

For one-sided copying, follow steps 4 through

7 on page 4-12.

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

NOTE

3 ^{Place the originals on the document glass.}

To erase shadows caused by document binding, use

the edge erase function (page 5-4). (Centre Erase

and Edge + Centre Erase cannot be used in

combination.)

When copying a thick

book, press down lightly

on the book to flatten it

against the document

glass.

To cancel the dual page copy function, touch the

[DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the special modes

screen (screen of step 1).

Index

²" x 11"

This page

is copied

first.

Centre line of

original

(8 ²" x 11")

(11" x 17")

Place the opened original on the document glass so

that the first page you wish to copy is on the right and

the centre of the original is aligned with the size mark.

5-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Pamphlet copy

The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in proper order for eventual centre-stapling and folding into a

booklet. Two original pages are copied onto each side of copy paper. Four pages are, therefore, copied onto one sheet.

This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.

NOTE

To make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function (page 5-25). The book

copy function scans the opened original in two-page units. (Two pages are scanned at each scan, reducing the

number of repetitions of the scanning operation by a half.)

[Example] Copying eight originals in the pamphlet copy mode

ꢀ When using this function, a duplex module must

Originals

(one-sided)

Finished copies are

folded in two.

be installed.

ꢀ Scan the originals from the first page to the last

page. The order of copying will be automatically

adjusted by the machine.

ꢀ Either left binding (right to left turning) or right

binding (left to right turning) can be selected.

Left binding

First page

ꢀ

Four originals will be copied onto one sheet.

Blank pages may be automatically produced at

the end depending on the number of the originals.

Originals

(two-sided)

ꢀ If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies can

be stapled in two positions along the centre of

copies and folded at the centre.

Right binding

First page

Select the binding position (left binding or

right binding).

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

LEFT

BINDING

RIGHT

BINDING

Touch the [PAMPHLET COPY] key on the

special modes screen.

SPECIAL MODES

The PAMPHLET COPY

setting screen will

MARGIN SHIFT

ERASE

appear. The pamphlet

copy icon ( , etc.) will

also appear in the upper

left corner of the screen

to indicate that the

function is turned on.

JOB

BUILD

PAMPHLET COPY

If you wish to insert a different type of paper for use as

a cover, follow steps 4 through 12 below.

If you do not wish to insert paper for a cover, continue

from step 8 on the next page.

4 ^{Touch the [COVER SETTING] key.}

Designate the type of originals to be

copied: 1-sided or 2-sided.

CANCEL

Select the [2-SIDED]

key if you wish to scan a

RIGHT

ORIGINAL

BINDING

1-SIDED

2-SIDED

two-sided original using

the automatic document

feeder.

COVER

SETTING

5-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Select whether or not you wish to copy on

the cover ("YES" or "NO").

PRINT ON COVER

Place the original in the document feeder

or on the document glass. (page 4-3)

Ensure that the desired paper size has

been automatically selected based on the

YES

original size.

AUTO

To select another size

EXPOSURE

paper, select the desired

size and touch the

[AUTO IMAGE] key. The

appropriate copy ratio

AUTO

PAPER SELECT

6 ^{Select the paper tray for the cover.}

will

selected

100%

(1)The currently selected

paper tray for the

cover is displayed.

CANCEL

automatically based on

COPY RATIO

the original size and the paper size. (See steps 2

and 3 on page 4-15.)

PAPER TRAY

(2)The size and type of

paper in the currently

(1)

(2)

TRAY2

Select any desired copy settings such as

the exposure or number of copies, and

then press the [START] key.

PLAIN

selected

tray

displayed.

In the example screen above, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

size plain paper is loaded.

[When using the automatic document

feeder:]

To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the tray

selection key. (In the screen example, the " TRAY2"

display is the tray selection key.)

Copying will start after all originals have been

scanned. (The next step is not needed.)

The tray selection screen appears when the tray

selection key is touched. Select the desired tray in

this screen.

[When using the document glass:]

Replace the original with the next original and

press the [START] key. Repeat this operation until

all originals have been scanned and then touch

the [READ-END] key.

NOTES

ꢀ Two-sided copying is not possible on label sheets,

and transparency film. When copying on a cover,

do not select a tray that has one of these types of

paper.

ꢀ Select the same size of paper for the covers as for

the copies.

NOTES

ꢀ When the pamphlet copy function is set, the two-

sided copying mode will be automatically

selected.

ꢀ If this function is used in combination with the

pamphlet copy function (pamphlet stapling) and

the number of original pages exceeds the number

of pages that can be stapled, a message asking

you to select "CANCEL", "CONTINUE", or

"DIVIDE" will appear.

To cancel the job, select "CANCEL". To make

pamphlet copies without stapling, select

"CONTINUE". To divide the pages into sets that

can be stapled, select "DIVIDE".

7 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

CANCEL

RIGHT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

If you performed steps 4 to 6 to insert cover paper,

divided stapling is not possible. You can either

continue pamphlet copying without stapling, or

cancel the job.

8 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

Return to the main

screen of copy mode.

CANCEL

To cancel the pamphlet copy function, touch the

[CANCEL] key on the pamphlet copy setting screen

(step 7).

RIGHT

BINDING

LEFT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

5-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Job build

Use job build mode when you need to copy more originals than can be placed in the document feeder at once. The

maximum number of originals that can be placed in the document feeder at once is 50 sheets (30 sheets when the

size is B4 or larger; for more information see "Acceptable originals" on page 4-2). This function lets you divide and

scan the originals in sets. This function allows the original pages to be scanned in sets.

[Example] Copying 100 pages of A4 originals

Originals

A:50 sheets

B:50 sheets

100 original pages

*Divide the originals into sets of 50 pages each.

Scan the originals starting from the first page of set

A. Scan set B next, taking care to keep the correct

page order.

Make sure that the desired paper size is

selected, select the number of copies or

other copy settings, and press the

[START] key.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

Scanning of originals will

start. After scanning of

the first set of originals (A

in the example above) is

completed, remove the

Touch the [JOB BUILD] key on the special

modes screen.

The [JOB BUILD] key

will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the job

DUAL

COP

N SHIFT

ERASE

scanned originals, place

the next set of originals

JOB

BUILD

TANDE

COPY

LET COPY

build icon

(

)

will

(set B in the example) and press the [START] key.

Repeat this operation until all sets of originals have

been scanned.

appear in the upper left

of the screen.

5 ^{Touch the [READ-END] key.}

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

Return to the main

PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].

WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].

screen of copy mode.

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

RASE

READ-END

TANDEM

COPY

JOB

BUILD

Place the first set of originals in the

document feeder tray. (page 4-3)

To cancel the job build function, touch the [JOB

BUILD] key on the special modes screen (step 1).

The highlighted display will be cancelled.

5-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Tandem copy

Two machines connected to the same network can be used to run a large copy job in parallel.

By dividing the job in half, approximately half the time is required to complete the job.

To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network as network printers. Even if more machines are

connected to the network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job.

Server machine and client machine

ꢀIn the following explanations, the machine on which

the copy job is initially set up and tandem copy

selected is called the server machine. The other

machine that is asked to share the job is called the

client machine.

ꢀTo use the tandem copy function, the tandem

settings must be configured in the key operator

programs. (See page 5-7 of the "Operation manual

50 sets of copies

100 sets of copies

(for printer)")

ꢀWhen configuring the tandem settings in the server

machine, the IP address of the client machine must

be entered. For the port number, it is best to use the

initial setting (50001). Unless you experience

difficulty with this setting, do not change it. The

tandem settings should be configured by your

network administrator. If the server and client

machines will alternate server and client roles, the IP

address of the server machine must also be entered

in the client machine. The same port number can be

set in both machines.

Set the number of copies with the numeric

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

keys.

Up to 999 copies can be

set. When the [START]

key is pressed, the

copies will automatically

be divided between the

Touch the [TANDEM COPY] key on the

special modes screen.

server

and

client

The [TANDEM COPY]

key will be highlighted to

1/3

machines. If an odd

number of copies is set, the server machine will

make the extra set.

DUAL PAGE

COPY

ERASE

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the

TANDEM

COPY

JOB

BUILD

tandem copy icon (

)

will appear in the upper

left of the screen.

If an incorrect number of copies is set...

Press the clear key and set the correct number of

copies.

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

Place the original in the document feeder

or on the document glass. (page 4-3)

You will return to the

main screen of copy

mode.

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

RASE

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

5-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

5 ^{Press the [START] key.}

NOTES

ꢀ To perform tandem copying, the server machine and client machine must meet certain conditions.

After the [START] key is pressed on the server machine, the server machine verifies that the conditions have

been met. If the conditions have not been met, tandem copying does not begin and "TANDEM OUTPUT IS

NOT ALLOWED. OUTPUT ALL SETS USING MASTER MACHINE?" appears in the display. To have the

server machine make all the copies, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [CANCEL] key.

• As an example, the following conditions must be met when a staple finisher is installed on the server machine

and not on the client machine:

(1) If tandem copying is executed for a two-sided copy job with the number of copies set to 999 and "Non-

staple" is selected, tandem copying will take place.

(2) If tandem copying is executed for a two-sided copy job with the number of copies set to 999

and

"Staple" is selected, tandem copying will not take place because the client machine does not have a

finisher.

ꢀ After the [START] key is pressed, if the client machine cannot print because it is out of paper or other reason,

the server machine will print its half of the job. The other half of the job will be stored in the client machine and

the job will be printed when the client machine is able to print.

ꢀ If auditing mode is enabled on both the server and client machines, the same account number must be entered

on both machines.

ꢀ If auditing mode is enabled on the client machine but not on the server machine, tandem copying cannot be

performed.

To cancel the tandem copy function, touch the

[TANDEM COPY] key on the special modes screen

(step 2). The highlighted display will be cancelled.

5-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Covers/inserts

A different type of paper can be inserted in positions corresponding to front and back covers of a copy job when the

automatic document feeder is used. A different type of paper can also be automatically added as an insert at

specified pages.

ꢀ Covers/inserts can be disabled in the key operator programs (page 11 of the key operator's guide).

Example of adding covers

Example of adding inserts

Originals

Back cover

Front cover

Inserts

Example of adding covers and inserts

Originals

About the explanations of covers and

inserts

There are various ways of using covers and inserts.

To keep the explanations simple, covers and

inserts are explained separately. The procedure for

inserting covers is explained on page 5-12. The

procedure for adding inserts is explained on page 5-

13. After reading these explanations, see the

examples of using covers and inserts on pages 5-

16 to 5-21.

Back

cover

Front

cover

Inserts

ꢁ Preparations for using covers and inserts

ꢀ Load the cover/insert paper in the tray before using the cover/insert function.

ꢀ Use the same size of paper for the covers/inserts as for the copies. (For the procedures for loading paper, see

pages 2-2 to 2-7.)

ꢀ Before selecting the cover/insert function, place the originals in the document feeder, select one-sided or two-

sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings as explained on pages

4-7 to 4-10. When these settings have been completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts on the

following page.

ꢀ The original must be scanned from the document feeder. The document glass cannot be used.

ꢀ Up to 100 covers/inserts can be inserted. Two covers/inserts cannot be inserted between the same pages.

ꢀ Pamphlet copying cannot be used in combination with covers/inserts.

ꢀ When performing two-sided copying of two-sided originals, an insert cannot be added between the front and

back sides of an original page.

5-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢁ Procedure for inserting front and back cover paper

The paper for the front cover is called the front cover paper ("FRONT COVER" in the touch panel). The paper

for the back cover is called the back cover paper ("BACK COVER" in the touch panel).

ꢀExamples of insertion methods for the front and back cover paper are given on pages 5-17 to 5-20.

Set the insertion conditions for the front

To display the special modes screen...

cover paper.

See "General procedure for using special

PLEASE SET UP A FRONT COVER.

functions" on page 5-2.

CANCEL

PAPER TRAY

TRAY2

FRONT COVER SETTING

PRINT ON FRONT COVER

Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the

special modes screen (2nd screen).

YES

1-SIDED

2-SIDED

PLAIN

SPECIAL MODES

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

COVERS/INSERTS

(Y)

(Z)

(X)

(1)Select whether or not the front cover paper is to be

copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]).

(2)Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided

copying is to be performed on the front cover

paper with the (Y) keys. This selection is only

possible when the [YES] key of (X) has been

selected. (The one-sided/two-sided selection

made here only applies to the front cover paper.

When the back cover paper is selected, the

selection only applies to the back cover paper.)

(3)The (Z) key shows the tray selected for the front

cover paper in step 3 and the paper size and

type.

BOOK COPY

CARD SHOT

2 ^{Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.}

CANCEL

COVERS/INSERTS

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

FRONT COVER

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

PAGE LAYOUT

BACK COVER

Select the tray used for the front cover

paper.

Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 5.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

FRONT COVER

TRAY2

BACK COVER

When you return to the screen of step 2, the

[FRONT COVER] key will be highlighted.

TTRRAAYY22

TRAY2

PLAIN

To insert back cover paper, repeat steps 2

through 6, using the [BACK COVER] key

instead of the [FRONT COVER] key.

(X)

(Y)

(1)The tray name (tray position) selected for the

front cover paper and the paper size and type

are shown in (X). If the tray in which you

loaded paper for the front cover is shown, touch

the [OK] key. You will return to the screen of

step 2.

PLEASE SET UP COVERS/INSERTS.

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS

FRONT COVER

CANCEL

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTINGS

BACK COVER

PAGE LAYOUT

(2)If the correct tray for the cover sheet paper

does not appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The

tray selection screen will appear. Select the

tray in which you loaded paper for the front

cover. You will return to the screen of above.

Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the

screen of step 7 to display a list of the

selected settings (page 5-15).

To exit the cover/insert settings, touch the

upper [OK] key in the screen of step 7.

Touch the [FRONT COVER] key in the

screen of step 2.

9 ^{Press the [START] key.}

To cancel covers/inserts settings...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2.

5-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢁ Procedure for adding inserts

You can have different paper automatically inserted as an insert at a specified pages. Two types of insert paper

can be used. These are specified with the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key and [INSERTION TYPE B

SETTING] in the touch panel.

ꢀExamples of insertion methods for insert paper are given on page 5-21.

Set the insertion conditions for insertion

To display the special modes screen...

type A .

See "General procedure for using special

CANCEL

INSERTION TYPE A SETTING

functions" on page 5-2.

PAPER TRAY

PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS

TRAY2

YES

Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the

special modes screen (2nd screen).

1-SIDED

2-SIDED

PLAIN

SPECIAL MODES

(Y)

(Z)

(X)

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

COVERS/INSERTS

(1)Select whether or not insertion type A paper is

to be copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or

[NO]).

BOOK COPY

CARD SHOT

(2)Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided

copying is to be performed on insertion type A

with the (Y) keys. This selection is only possible

when the [YES] key of (X) has been selected.

(The one-sided/two-sided selection made here

only applies to insertion type A paper. When

insertion type B is selected, the selection only

applies to insertion type B paper.) The [2-SIDED]

key appears when the duplex module is installed.

(3)The (Z) key shows the tray selected for insertion

type A in step 3 and the paper size and type.

2 ^{Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.}

CANCEL

COVERS/INSERTS

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

FRONT COVER

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

PAGE LAYOUT

BACK COVER

3 ^{Select the tray used for insertion type A.}

Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 5.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

When you return to the screen of step 2, the

[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key will be

highlighted.

INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

FRONT COVER

BACK COVER

TRAY2

If you wish to insert a different paper with

the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key,

repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the

[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key,

and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key.

PLAIN

(X)

(Y)

(1)The tray name (tray position) selected for

insertion type A and the paper size and type are

shown in (X). If the tray in which you loaded

paper for insertion type A is shown, touch the

[OK] key. You will return to the screen of step 2.

CANCEL

(2)If the correct tray for insertion type A does not

appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray

selection screen will appear. Select the tray in

which you loaded paper for insertion type A.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

PAGE LAYOUT

Touch the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]

key in the screen of step 2

5-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Touch the [INSERTION SETTINGS] key to

specify the pages where you wish to insert

the insert papers of [INSERTION TYPE A

If you wish to insert a different paper with

the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key,

repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the

[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key,

and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key.

SETTING] and [INSERTION TYPE

SETTING].

CANCE

RTION

SETTING

INSERTION

SETTINGS

CANCEL

TION

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

SETTING

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

PAGE LAYOUT

Touch the [INSERTION TYPE A] key or the

[INSERTION TYPE B] key, enter the page

number where you wish to insert the insert

paper with the numeric keys, and then

touch the [ENTER] key.

Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the

screen of step 11 to display a list of the

selected settings (page 5-15).

To exit the cover/insert settings, touch the

upper [OK] key in the screen of step 11.

INPUT THE PAGE NUMBER AND

PRESS [ENTER]. USE [C] KEY TO AMEND.

INSERTION SETTINGS

INSERTION PAGE

13^{Press the [START] key.}

To cancel covers/inserts settings...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2.

INSERTION

TYPE B

INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TOTAL:0

TRAY2

8₂x11

PLAIN

ENTER

(X)

(Y)

(Z)

(1)(X) shows the total number of inserts. Up to 100

inserts can be added. When inserting multiple

inserts, touch the [ENTER] key after each entry

of an insertion page number (insertion position)

with the numeric keys.

(2)(Y) shows the tray selected in step 3 for

[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] and the paper

size and type.

(3)(Z) shows the tray selected in step 3 for

[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] and the paper

size and type.

(4)When the [INSERTION TYPE A] key is

highlighted, the insert settings apply to

[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]. When the

[INSERTION TYPE B] key is highlighted, the

insert settings apply to [INSERTION TYPE B

SETTING].

Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 9.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

5-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢁ Checking, editing, and deleting cover/insert pages

The [PAGE LAYOUT] key appears after covers/inserts settings are configured (the settings of step 1 through

step 7 on pages 5-12 and 5-13).

The [PAGE LAYOUT] key is used for the following:

ꢀ To display the status of covers/inserts pages

ꢀ To edit, delete, or add inserted pages

(3)To edit or delete the insertion page of an insert,

To display the [PAGE LAYOUT] key...

Configure the settings in step 1 through step 7

on pages 5-12 and 5-13.

touch the key of the insert that you wish to edit

or delete in the page layout screen. When the

key is touched, the [CANCEL], [DELETE], or

[AMEND] keys appear.

1 ^{Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key.}

AMEND THE INSERTION?

CANCEL

DELETE

AMEND

CANCEL

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

PAGE LAYOUT

ꢀTo cancel, touch the [CANCEL] key.

ꢀTo delete an inserted page, touch the

[DELETE] key.

ꢀTo edit an inserted page, touch the [AMEND]

key. The screen of step 9 on page 5-14

appears. Edit the insertion page in the screen

that appears.

2 ^{The set covers/inserts pages are shown.}

PAGE LAYOUT

1/2

INSERTION

TYPE A

12/-

INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

7/8

FRONT COVER

(4)To edit or delete a cover page, touch the [BACK

COVER] key in the page layout screen. The

screen of step 5 on page 5-12 will appear. Edit

or delete the cover page in this screen.

(1)If there are multiple screens, touch the

key to change screens.

(2)Displayed icons:

: Front side copy only

: Back side copy only

: Two-sided copy

When you have finished checking the

pages, touch the [OK] key.

: No copying

For inserts, the insertion page also appears.

" represents a page number.

1/2

/- : Front side copy only at page

INSERTION

TYPE A

: Two-sided copy at page

: Insert non-copied insert at page

5-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Q Examples of covers and inserts

The relations between the originals and finished copies when covers or inserts are inserted are shown on the

following pages.

Covers

OOne-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-17)

OTwo-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-18)

OOne-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-19)

OTwo-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-20)

Inserts

OOne-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-21)

OTwo-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-21)

OOne-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-21)

OTwo-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-21)

Q Symbols used for covers and inserts

The following symbols are used to make the explanations easier to understand.

The numbers that appear indicate relations between the originals and copies, and will vary depending on the

settings.

Icon

Symbol

Meaning

appearing

in display

Symbol

Meaning

appearing

in display

Front cover when not

copied on.

Insert when not copied on.

Front cover after one-sided

copying.

Insert

copying.

after one-sided

Front cover after one-sided

copying of a two-sided

original. (One page is not

copied on.)

Insert

copying of a

original. (One page is not

copied on.)

after one-sided

two-sided

Front cover after two-sided

copying.

Insert

copying.

after

two-sided

Back cover when not

copied on.

One-sided

output page of regular one-

sided copying

original

Back cover after one-sided

Two-sided

output page of regular two-

sided copying.

original

copying

original.

one-sided

Back cover after one-sided

copying of a two-sided

original. (One page is not

copied on.)

One-sided

output page of regular one-

sided copying.

original

Back cover after two-sided

copying.

Two-sided copy when only

one side is copied on due

to insufficient originals.

5-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢁ Covers (One-sided copying of one-sided originals)

One-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals.

1st page

2nd page

3rd page

4th page

5th page

6th page

Copying on cover

Resulting copies

Front cover

Back cover

No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

5-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢁ Covers (Two-sided copying of one-sided originals)

Two-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals.

1st page

2nd page

3rd page

4th page

5th page

6th page

Copying on cover

Resulting copies

Front cover

Back cover

No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

5-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢁ Covers (One-sided copying of Two-sided originals)

One-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals.

1st page

2nd page

3rd page

Copying on cover

Resulting copies

Front cover

Back cover

No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

5-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢁ Covers (Two-sided copying of two-sided originals)

Two-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals.

1st page

2nd page

3rd page

Copying on cover

Resulting copies

Front cover

Back cover

No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

5-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢁ Inserts (One-sided copying of one-sided originals)

One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following one-sided originals. The insertion page of

the insert is set to page 3.

1st page

2nd page

3rd page

4th page

5th page

6th page

Copying on

insert

Resulting copies

(two-sided copying)

Resulting copies (one-sided copying)

No copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

ꢁ Inserts (One-sided copying of two-sided originals)

One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following two-sided originals. The insertion page of

the insert is set to page 3

1st page

2nd page

3rd page

Copying on

insert

Resulting copies

(two-sided copying)

Resulting copies (one-sided copying)

No copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

5-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Transparency film with insert sheets

When copying onto transparency film, blank insert sheets can be placed between transparent sheets.

Example: Inserting insert sheets between transparencies

●

This function only operates in "one-sided to one-

sided" and "two-sided to one-sided" modes.

● Multiple copies cannot be selected in this mode.

Originals (1-sided)

●

The inserts are inserted under each transparency

as shown at left.

●

Select insert paper that is the same size as the

transparencies.

Originals (2-sided)

● Transparencies can be fed from the tray 2 or

bypass tray.

Insert sheets

●

If the transparencies are loaded in tray 2, be sure

to set the paper size and paper type as explained

on pages 2-5 and 2-6.

Inserts can also be

copied on.

Two-sided originals are only

supported when automatic

document feeder is used.

Touch the

settings screen of tray 2.

key to display the tray

1 ^{Load transparency film into the tray 2.}

Remove any paper

already in the tray 2

CUSTOM SETTINGS

FIXED PAPER SIDE

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

before

the

TYPE / SIZE

transparency film. (To

load paper in the tray 2,

see pages 2-6 and 2-7.)

1/4

TRAY 1

PLAIN / A4

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE STAPLE

DISABLE PUNCH

DOC.

FILING

I-FAX

COPY

FAX

2 ^{Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.}

6 ^{Touch the [TYPE/SIZE] key.}

The custom settings

screen

will

PER TRAY SETTINGS

TYPE / SIZE

appear.

TRAY 2

PLAIN / A4

FAX

I-FAX

DOC.

FILING

COPY

3 ^{Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.}

7 ^{Touch the [TRANSPARENCY] key.}

The paper tray selection

TYPE.

screen will appear.

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

RINT

LETTER HEAD

PRE-PUNCHED

COLOUR

HEAVY PAPER

LABELS

ATA

PRINTER

CONDITION

ORWARD

TRANSPARENCY

4 ^{Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.}

8 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

CUSTOM SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

TYPE

TYPE/SIZE SETTING

JAPANESE

SIZE

AUTO-INCH

AUTO-AB

²X11,8²x11

TRAY SETTINGS

A4,A4R,B5,B5R

NON STANDARD

SIZE

SIZE INPUT

2/2

If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an

inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, be sure

to set the paper type and size as explained on steps

5 to 6 on page 2-5 and steps 7 to 10 on page 2-6

5-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Set the insertion conditions for the insert

paper.

9 ^{Select the tray 2.}

OR COPY.

AUTO

ORIGIN

PLAIN

1. A4

2. A4

3. A3

4. A4

CANCEL

AUT

EXPOS

PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS

YES NO

INSERTION SHEET

TRAY3

TRANSPARENCY

PLAIN

PAPE

PLAIN

100

COPY R

(X)

(Y)

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

(1) Select whether or not the insert paper will be

copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]).

(2) The (Y) key shows the tray selected for the

insert paper and the paper size and type. To

select a different tray, touch this key to display

the tray selection screen and select the tray that

has the insert paper.

Touch the [TRANSPARENCY INSERTS]

key in the special modes screen (2nd

screen).

The Transparency inserts

setting screen will appear.

The transparency inserts

SPECIAL MODES

Touch the outer [OK] key in the screen of

step 7.

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

COVERS/INSERTS

BOOK COPY

icon (

, etc.) will also

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

appear in the upper left

corner of the screen to

indicate that the function

is turned on.

CARD SHOT

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass

is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-13.

To cancel the Transparency film with insert sheets

function, touch the [CANCEL] key on the

Transparency film with insert sheets setting screen.

Multi shot

Multiple original pages can be copied onto one sheet of copy paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two

original pages onto one sheet, or 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when

you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.

[Example] Copying 4 original pages onto one sheet of paper

(Page number : 4in1, layout : left top : right top (see the next page))

ꢀ When using the multi shot function, place the

One-sided copies from

one-sided originals

originals, select the desired paper size, and

select the copying mode before selecting the

multi shot function on the special modes screen.

ꢀ When using the multi shot function, the

appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set

based on the original size, paper size, and the

number of originals to be copied onto one sheet.

The minimum reduction ratio is 25%. The

original size, copy paper size, and selected

Copies

number of original pages may require that the

One-sided copies from

ratio be less than 25%. As copying will take

place at 25% in this case, part of the original

images may be cut off.

two-sided originals

5-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Touch the [OK] key (inside [OK] key) on

the multi shot setting screen.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

You will return to the special modes screen.

Touch the [OK] key in the special modes

screen.

Touch the [MULTI SHOT] key in the special

modes screen (2nd screen).

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

The MULTI SHOT setting

screen will appear.

A multi shot icon (

TRANSPARENCY

MULTI SHOT

About the steps that follow

INSERTS

etc.) will also appear in

the upper left of the

screen to indicate that

the function is turned on.

If an automatic document feeder is being used, see

pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is

being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-13.

MIRROR

IMAGE

CARD SHOT

To cancel the multi shot function, touch the [CANCEL]

key in the multi shot setting screen (the screen of step

2).

Select the number of images to be copied

onto one sheet of copy paper.

orientation of the copy

paper and the

needed,

the

SPECIAL MODES

MULTI SHOT

2in1

4in1

orientation of the images

will be rotated.

3 ^{Select the layout.}

Select the order in which

the originals will be

arranged on the copy.

CANCEL

LAYOUT

Shot number

2in1

Layout

4in1

The arrows in the above diagram indicate the

directions in which the images are arranged.

5-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Book copy

This function is convenient when you wish to compile copies of books or other bound originals into an attractive

pamphlet format. The two pages of the open book are scanned as a set, and two pages each are copied onto the

front and back sides of the copy paper (four pages are copied onto one sheet of copy paper). This allows the copies

to be folded down the centre and made into a pamphlet.

[Example] Book copying an 8-page pamphlet

ꢀ When using this function, a duplex module must

be installed.

Originals

Finished copies are

folded in two.

ꢀ Scan the originals from the first page to the last

page. The order of copying will be automatically

adjusted by the machine.

Left binding

ꢀ Either left binding (right to left turning) or right

binding (left to right turning) can be selected.

First page

ꢀ

Four originals will be copied onto one sheet.

Blank pages may be automatically produced at

the end depending on the number of the originals.

ꢀ If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, book copy

can be used in combination with the pamphlet

function to staple and fold the copies at the

centreline.

Right binding

First page

Touch the [OK] key in the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

Place the originals on the document glass.

(page 4-3)

Touch the [BOOK COPY] key in the special

modes screen (2nd screen).

Scan the original pages in

the following order:

Opened front and back

cover

Opened inside of front

cover and 1st page

Opened 2nd and 3rd page

The

setting

BOOK

screen

COPY

will

SPECIAL MODES

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

COVERS/INSERTS

appear. The book copy

icon ( , etc.) will also

appear in the upper left

corner of the screen to

indicate that the function

is turned on.

BOOK COPY

CARD SHOT

Opened last page and

inside of back cover

Make sure that the desired paper size has

Select whether the book opens to the left or

to the right, and touch the [OK] key in the

book copy setting screen.

been selected.

AUTO

EXPOSURE

If the desired paper size

is not selected, select

the desired size.

You will return to the

special modes screen.

RIGHT

LEFT

AUTO

BINDING

PAPER SELECT

SET

100%

COPY RATIO

Select the number of copies and any other

desired copy settings, and then press the

[START] key.

3 ^{Select any desired cover settings.}

Place the next two pages and press the

[START] key. Repeat until all pages have

been scanned, and then touch the [READ-

END] key.

CANCEL

If you wish to use a

different type of paper for

the cover, perform steps

4 to 12 on pages 5-6 to 5-

RIGHT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

When book copy is selected, two-sided

copying is automatically selected.

If you do not wish to use

a different type of paper,

continue from step 4.

To cancel the book copy function, touch the [CANCEL] key

in the book copy setting screen (the screen of step 2).

5-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Card shot

When copying a card, this function allows you to combine the front and back sides on a single sheet of paper.

This function is convenient for making copies for certification purposes and helps save paper.

● Copying is only possible on standard size paper.

● A copy ratio cannot be selected when using this

function.

Original

CARD

Copy

● The image cannot be rotated when using this

function.

CARD

Front of

card

CARD

Back of

card

Example:

Portrait

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size

Example:

Landscape

A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size

Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then

select the desired paper size.

Enter the X dimension (width) and Y

dimension (length) of the original with the

keys.

The selected paper size

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

key is highlighted and

the paper selection

screen closes.

CANCEL

1. A4

PLAIN

2. B4

3. B4

4. A4

SIZE RESET

PLAIN

FIT TO

PAGE

NOTE

If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray,

load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the

bypass tray. (See "Setting the paper type and paper

size" on page 2-5.)

●X (width) is initially selected. Enter X and then

touch the Y ( ) key to enter Y.

●To return the X and Y values to the initial

settings configured in the key operator

programs, touch the [SIZE RESET] key.

("CARD SHOT SETTINGS" on page 15 of the

key operator's guide).

●To have the images enlarged or reduced by a

suitable ratio based on the entered original

size so that the front and back sides fit into the

selected paper size, touch the [FIT TO PAGE]

key.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

Touch the [CARD SHOT] key in the special

modes screen (2nd screen).

The CARD SHOT

setting screen will

appear. A card shot

icon ( , etc.) will also

appear in the upper left

corner of the screen to

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

MULTI SHOT

MIRROR

IMAGE

CARD SHOT

indicate

that

the

function is turned on.

5-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Place the back side of the original face

down on the document glass (see step 5).

4 ^{Touch the outer [OK] key.}

You will return to the

main screen of copy

mode.

CANCEL

9 ^{Press the [START] key.}

SIZE RESET

The back side of the

card is scanned.

FIT TO

PAGE

5 ^{Place the original on the document glass.}

Place the front side of

the original face down

10^{Touch the [READ-END] key.}

and

the

document cover.

NOTE

The original must be placed on the document glass.

The document feeder (automatic document feeder)

cannot be used.

Follow steps 4 through 6 of "Copying from

the document glass" (page 4-11).

To cancel the card shot function, touch the

[CANCEL] key in the card shot setting screen (the

screen of step 4).

7 ^{Press the [START] key.}

The front side of the

card is scanned.

5-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Mirror image

This function is used to print a mirror image of the original. The images will be inverted in the right to left direction on

the copies.

Original

Copy

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

Touch the [MIRROR IMAGE] key in the

special modes screen (2nd screen).

The [MIRROR IMAGE]

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

key will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the

TRANSPARENCY

MULTI SHOT

INSERTS

MIRROR

IMAGE

CARD SHOT

mirror image icon (

)

will appear in the upper

left of the screen.

To cancel the mirror image function, touch the

[MIRROR IMAGE] key in the special modes screen

(the screen of step 1).

B/W reverse

Black and white are reversed in the copy to create a negative image.

NOTES

ꢀ When this function is selected, the exposure mode setting (page 4-14) automatically changes to "Text".

ꢀ Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be printed with black/white reverse

to reduce toner consumption.

Original

B/W reverse copy

Touch the [OK] key in the special modes

screen.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

Touch the [B/W REVERSE] key in the

special modes screen (3rd screen).

The [B/W REVERSE]

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

key will be highlighted to

ECIAL MODES

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the

B/W

REVERSE

PRINT MENU

mirror image icon (

will appear in the upper

left of the screen.

)

To cancel the B/W reverse function, touch the [B/W

REVERSE] key in the special modes screen (the

screen of step 1).

5-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Print menu

The date, a stamp, page numbers, and entered text can be printed on copies. Four selections are available for the

PRINT MENU:

• Date print (page 5-32)

• Stamp (page 5-33)

This prints the date on the paper.

[Example] Printing 2004/OCT/1 in the upper right-

hand corner of the paper

Print a message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" in

reverse text on the paper.

[Example] Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the upper

right-hand corner of the paper

2004/OCT/1

CONFIDENTIAL

The format of the date and the character that

separates the year, month, and day can be changed.

One of 12 stamps can be selected.

• Page numbering (page 5-34)

Page numbers can be printed on copies.

[Example] Printing page numbers in the bottom right-

hand corner of the paper

• Text (page 5-38)

Entered text can be printed.

[Example] Printing "October, 2004 Meeting" in the

upper left-hand corner of the paper

October, 2004 Meeting

Up to 50 characters can be printed. You can store up

to 30 sequences of frequently used text.

The format of the page number can be changed.

Six printing positions are available: left, centre, or right of the top or bottom of the page.

Each printing position is divided into an area for the date, page number, and text (A below), and an area for the stamp

(B below).

Top centre

Printing

area

Maximum number of

settings

Print menu

Top left

Top right

DATE

One position only

6 positions

STAMP

PAGE

NUMBERING

One position only

6 positions

TEXT

Bottom left

Bottom right

Bottom centre

NOTES

ꢀ A part that overlaps the printed text will not be copied.

ꢀ If the set text content overlaps the print content of another position, the central print content will be moved to the

bottom, the content on the left will be next, and the content on the right will be placed on top in that order such

that only the content visible at the top is printed. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.

ꢀ The printed text will be printed at the set size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size.

ꢀ The printed text will also be printed at the set density regardless of the copy exposure.

ꢀ Some copy paper sizes may cause the printed contents to be cut off or the print position to shift.

ꢀ If a copy job with a print menu setting is saved using the document filing function, the print menu setting will not

be saved. If you wish to print a file saved in copy mode and use a print menu setting, use the special modes in

the Job settings / print screen (or the document filing print screen in the Web page if the machine is connected

to a network) to select the print menu setting. (A print menu setting cannot be selected when printing a file saved

in a mode other than copy mode.)

5-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢀ Common operation procedure for using the print menu

To select print menu settings at another

print position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special functions"

on page 5-2.

NOTES

ꢁ If the [DATE], [PAGE NUMBERING], or [TEXT] key

is touched when other than a "STAMP" print menu

setting has been selected for the print position

selected in step 2, a message will appear. To

overwrite the previously set print content of the

print menu that you touched, touch the [YES] key.

To keep the previous settings, touch the [NO] key.

Touch the [PRINT MENU] key in the special

modes screen (3rd screen).

The print menu setting

screen will appear. The

print menu icon ( ) will

also appear in the upper

left corner of the screen

to indicate that the

function is turned on.

ꢁ

The "DATE" and "PAGE NUMBERING" cannot be set

in multiple positions. If either of these keys is touched

when a date or page numbering setting has already

been configured, a message will appear asking you if

you wish to move the print settings to the position that

you selected in step 2. To move the print settings,

touch the [YES] key. Otherwise touch the [NO] key.

B/W

REVERSE

PRINT MENU

2 ^{Select the print position.}

key.

5 ^{Touch the}

Six

positions

are

SPECIAL MODES

LAYOUT

CANCEL

available: left, centre,

or right of the top or

bottom of the page.

The touched key is

highlighted.

1/2

LAYOU

PRINT MENU

DATE

STAMP

PAGE

NUMBERING

TEXT

The keys indicating the print position appear as

follows depending on the state of the setting:

To specify the orientation of the original,

touch the [ORIGINAL ORIENTATION] key.

SPECIAL MODES

Not selected, print menu setting has not

been selected.

LAYOUT

2/2

CANCEL

PRINT MENU

ORIGINAL ORIENTATION

2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE

Selected during selection of the print

menu setting.

PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS

Not selected, print menu setting has

already been selected.

If you placed a two-sided original, touch the

] key to specify the binding style (book or

[

The image displayed within each key varies

depending on the key position.

tablet). The icon of the selected binding style is

highlighted.

If you are adding covers or inserts, select

whether or not you wish to print on the

covers or inserts.

3 ^{Select the print menu.}

The settings screen of

the

appears.

For information on

each of the print

menus,

SPECIAL MODES

LAYOUT

DATE

CANCEL

STAMP

LAYOUT

2/2

CANCEL

1/2

PRINT MENU

ORIGINAL ORIENTATION

2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE

PAGE

NUMBERING

TEXT

see

the

PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS

settings of each.

If you do not wish to print on covers or inserts,

touch the checkbox to remove the checkmark.

ꢁDATE (page 5-32) ꢁ STAMP (page 5-33)

ꢁPAGE NUMBERING (page 5-34)

ꢁTEXT (page 5-38)

NOTES

ꢁ

If you are not copying on covers or inserts, printing will

not take place on these even if a checkmark appears.

ꢁ A page number is never printed on covers or

inserts, regardless of the above setting.

ꢁ If covers/inserts have been disabled in the key

operator programs, the checkbox will be greyed out

to prevent selection.

5-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Check the print layout if needed (page 5-

40).

NOTE

To cancel print menu...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 3.

To display the layout

and print content of the

LAYOUT

CANCEL

configured print menu,

touch the [LAYOUT]

key. The position can

2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE

changed

and

S WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS

settings cancelled if

needed.

Touch the [OK] key on the print menu

setting screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used, see

pages 4-7 through 4-10.

If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11

through 4-13.

Printing in combination with other special functions

When a print menu is combined with one of the following special modes, printing will reflect the selected special

mode.

Special modes

Margin shift

Printing operation

Like the copy image, the printed contents are shifted in accordance with the set margin.

The print content is printed on each copy sheet.

Dual page copy

Pamphlet copy

Book copy

The print content is printed on each page of the "book".

Multi shot

Card shot

The print content is printed on each copy sheet.

Covers/inserts

Whether it prints on the cover pages or the inserted pages needs to select in the print menu.

NOTE

When combined with "Erase", "Job build", "Mirror image" or "B/W reverse", printing takes place normally at the set

position on the paper.

5-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Q Printing the date on copies

The date can be printed on copies. Four selections each are available for the date format and the character that

separates the year, month, and day.

NOTE

The date must be previously set in the custom settings. (See page 2-13.)

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-30).

5 ^{Select the pages to be printed on.}

CANCEL

Select whether to print

on only the first page,

or all pages. The

FIRST PAGE

CURRENT SETTING

2004/AUG/01

2 ^{Touch the [DATE] key.}

touched

highlighted.

key

ALL PAGES

DATE CHANGE

LAYOUT

CANCEL

STAMP

1/2

DATE

6 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

PAGE

NUMBERING

TEXT

CANCEL

3 ^{Select the date format.}

FIRST PAGE

CURRENT SETTING

2004/AUG/01

The selected date format

is highlighted.

DATE

ALL PAGES

DATE CHANGE

YYYY/MM/DD

MM/DD/YYYY

DD/MM/YYYY

MM DD, YYYY

If you selected [YYYY/

MM/DD], [MM/DD/YYYY],

or [DD/MM/YYYY], you

can select the character

that separates the year,

Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-30).

month, and date. Select [/] (slash), [.] (period), [-]

(hyphen), or [ ] (space).

4 ^{Check the date and format.}

NOTE

To cancel a date print setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the date selection

screen. (The screen of step 6.)

The date to be printed

CANCEL

displayed

FIRST PAGE

CURRENT SETTING

2004/AUG/01

"CURRENT SETTING"

in the selected format.

The date that appears

is the date set in the

machine. If you need to

ALL PAGES

DATE CHANGE

change the date, touch the [DATE CHANGE] key.

The following screen appears.

DATE CHANGE

YEAR

2004

MONTH

DAY

Touch the key of the number (year, month, or day)

that needs to be changed, and then adjust the

number with the

key. When finished,

touch the [OK] key.

NOTE

If you select a non-existent date (for example, Feb. 30),

the [OK] key will grey out to prevent entry of the date.

5-32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢁ Printing a stamp (reverse text) on copies

A message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in reverse text on copies.

The following 12 messages are available.

CONFIDENTIAL

FOR YOUR INFO.

URGENT

PRIORITY

DO NOT COPY

DRAFT

PRELIMINARY

IMPORTANT

TOP SECRET

FINAL

COPY

PLEASE REPLY

You can select from three density levels for the background of the stamp.

Two selections are available for the size of the stamp.

NOTE

The text of the stamp cannot be edited.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-30).

5 ^{Select the desired stamp size.}

"LARGER" is initially

selected. To make the

stamp smaller, touch

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

1/2

2 ^{Touch the [STAMP] key.}

EXPOSURE

the

SMALLER]

[LARGER/

key.

SIZE

ALL PAGES

LARGER

"Smaller" is selected

when [SMALLER] is

highlighted.

SMALLER

LAYOUT

CANCEL

STAMP

1/2

DATE

PAGE

TEXT

6 ^{Select the pages to be printed on.}

NUMBERING

Select whether to print

on only the first page,

or all pages. The

CANCEL

3 ^{Select the stamp that you wish to print.}

FIRST PAGE

1/2

EXPOSURE

touched

highlighted.

key

SIZE

The selected stamp is

ALL PAGES

STAMP

LARGER

highlighted.

desired stamp does not

appear, change

screens with the

or key.

the

SMALLER

1/2

CONFIDENTIAL

FOR YOUR INFO.

URGENT

PRIORITY

DO NOT COPY

DRAFT

7 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

CANCEL

4 ^{Adjust the exposure as needed.}

FIRST PAGE

1/2

EXPOSURE

The density of the

background of the

SIZE

CANCEL

ALL PAGES

LARGER

FIRST PAGE

1/2

stamp can be adjusted.

Touch the [EXPOSURE]

key to display the

following screen.

SMALLER

EXPOSURE

SIZE

ALL PAGES

LARGER

Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-30).

SMALLER

Touch the

darker

Touch the

lighter background (3

levels).

key for a

background.

key for a

EXPOSURE

NOTE

To cancel a stamp setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the stamp selection

When finished, touch

the [OK] key.

screen. (The screen of step 7.)

5-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Q Printing the page number on copies

The page number can be printed on copies. One of 6 formats can be selected for the page number.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-30).

If you need to change the starting or

ending number of page numbering, the

first page printed on, or the print settings

for covers/inserts, touch the [PAGE

NUMBER] key.

2 ^{Touch the [PAGE NUMBERING] key.}

CANCEL

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

LAYOUT

CANCEL

STAMP

1/2

DATE

MANUAL

PAGE NUMBER

PAGE

NUMBERING

TEXT

5 ^{Touch the [MANUAL] key.}

3 ^{Select the page number format.}

PAGE NUMBER

The selected format is

highlighted.

FIRST NUMBER

PAGE NUMBERING

AUTO

PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT

(1),(2),(3)..

1,2,3..

PRINTING STARTS FROM

MANUAL

-1-,-2-,-3-..

<1>,<2>,<3>..

P.1,P.2,P.3..

1/5,2/5,3/5..

Enter settings for "FIRST NUMBER",

"LAST

NUMBER",

and

"PRINTING

STARTS FROM SHEET".

If you selected "1/5, 2/5, 3/5",

Touch each key so that

it is highlighted, and

then enter the number

with the numeric keys

(1 to 999).

"PAGE NUMBER/TOTAL PAGES" will be printed.

"AUTO" is initially selected for "TOTAL PAGE",

which means that the number of scanned original

pages is automatically used. If you need to enter

the total pages manually (for example, when a

large number of originals are scanned in batches),

touch the [MANUAL] key to display the total page

entry screen.

FIRST NUMBER

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET

To return a number to

its initial value (FIRST

NUMBER: 1, LAST NUMBER: AUTO, PRINTING

STARTS FROM SHEET: 1), press the [C] (clear)

key while the key of the number is highlighted. If

you enter the wrong number, press the [C] (clear)

key and enter the correct number.

CANCEL

PAGE NUMBERING

PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

(1),(2),(3)..

1,2,3..

TOTAL PAGE

-1-,-2-,-3-..

<1>,<2>,<3>..

P.1,P.2,P.3..

1/5,2/5,3/5..

PAGE

NOTES

MANUAL

O A last number smaller than the "FIRST NUMBER"

number cannot be set.

O "LAST NUMBER" is initially set to "AUTO", which

means that the page number is printed on each

page through the final page in accordance with the

"FIRST NUMBER" and "PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET" settings.

O A number less than the total page number is set as

the last number, the page number will not be

printed on the pages that follow the set number.

Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric

keys and touch the [OK] key.

NOTES

O When two-sided copying is performed, each side of

the paper is counted as a page. If the last page is

blank, it will not be included in the total pages.

However, if [COUNT BACK COVER] is selected,

the last page will be counted. (See step 7.)

O When used in combination with "Dual page copy",

"Multi shot", or "Card shot", the number of copied

images is the total pages.

Unlike the first and last page numbers, "PRINTING

STARTS FROM SHEET" specifies the sheet of paper

(not the page number) from which printing of the page

number begins.

For example, when "3" is selected for one-sided

copying, printing of the page number will start from the

3rd sheet of copy paper (the copy of the 3rd original

page). When '3" is selected for two-sided copying,

printing of the page number will start from the 3rd sheet

of copy paper, which is the copy of the 5th original page.

O When used in combination with "Pamphlet copy" or

"Book copy", the number of pages in the "book" is

the total pages.

5-34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

When covers/inserts are added and you

wish to include the covers/inserts in the

page number count, touch the [COVERS/

INSERTS COUNTING] key.

9 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

COVERS/INSERTS

COUNTING

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

COVERS/INSERTS

COUNTING

10^{Touch the [OK] key.}

Select the checkboxes of the items that

you wish to include in the page number

count and then touch the [OK] key.

CANCEL

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

COVERS/INSERTS COUNTING

MANUAL

COUNT FRONT COVER

PAGE NUMBER

COUNT INSERTS

COUNT BACK COVER

Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-30).

Front cover

image

Insert

image

Back cover

image

Items that are selected are reflected in the print

image on the right side of the screen.

NOTE

To cancel a page number setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the page number

selection screen. (The screen of step 10.)

NOTES

O When an item is selected, one inserted sheet (front

cover, insert, or back cover) is counted as one

page during one-sided copying, and two pages

during two-sided copying. However, if one-sided

copying is used for the body pages and two-sided

copying is used for the inserted sheets, each body

page will be counted as one page and each

inserted sheet will be counted as two pages.

Printing never takes place on the front cover and back

cover, regardless of whether or not these are counted.

O To print on an insert, the insert must be counted

and it must be copied on.

NOTES

Copying in group mode is not possible when page number printing is selected. The mode will automatically switch to sort mode.

O When the page number print position is set to the left or right side and "Pamphlet copy" or "Book copy" is

selected, the position of the page numbers will alternate so that they are always on the outside when the

pamphlet/book is opened. If a stamp is set in an area with a page numbering setting, the position of the stamp

will alternate in the same way.

If another item is set in a position that changes, that item will appear in the position that alternates with the page

number position.

Print menus not related to the alternating print positions will appear in their set positions.

[Example] When the page number format "1, 2, 3.." is selected when performing pamphlet copying of 4 pages,

the copies will appear as shown below.

In this example, the page number is at the bottom of the page and the date is at the top, so the

position of the date does not change.

Print settings

Front

Back

Date

2004/AUG/1

CONFIDENTIAL

Stamp

Page numbering

Text

Minutes of meeting Minutes of meeting

5-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Examples of page number printing

Page number printing during one-sided copying (5 originals)

Setting

TOTAL PAGE

Value

AUTO

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page

FIRST NUMBER

LAST NUMBER

A B C D E

AUTO

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET

FIRST NUMBER: 11

11/15

11/13

1/2

12/15

12/13

2/2

13/15

13/13

14/15

15/15

FIRST NUMBER: 11

LAST NUMBER: 13

Not printed Not printed

Printed contents when

settings are changed as

follows

TOTAL PAGE: 2

Not printed Not printed Not printed

TOTAL PAGE: 15

FIRST NUMBER: 11

LAST NUMBER: 13

11/15

12/15

13/15

1/3

Not printed Not printed

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 Not printed Not printed

2/3

3/3

Page number printing during two-sided copying (9 originals)

1st page

Front Back

2nd page

Front Back

3rd page

Front Back

4th page

5th page

Setting

Value

Front

Back

Front

Back

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

FIRST

NUMBER

A B C D E F G H I

1/9

2/9

3/9

4/9

5/9

6/9

7/9

3/5

8/9

4/5

9/9

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

PRINTING

STARTSFROM

SHEET

Printedcontents PRINTING

when settings STARTS

are changed as FROM

follows SHEET: 3

Not

printed

1/5

2/5

5/5

printed printed printed printed

Page number printing during one-sided copying of body pages with covers inserted (4 originals)

1st page

Setting

Value

(Front

cover)

2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

FIRST NUMBER

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

A B C D

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET

1/4

2/4

3/4

4/4

COUNT FRONT COVER

Not selected

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET: 2

Not printed Not printed

1/3

3/5

2/3

4/5

3/3

5/5

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

Not printed

2/5

Printed contents when

settings are changed

as follows

(count)

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET: 2

Not printed

1/4

2/4

3/4

4/4

(count)

When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way.

Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers.

5-36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with covers (one-side copying) inserted (9 originals)

1st page

2nd page

3rd page

4th page

5th page

(front cover)

Setting

Value

Front

Back

Front Back

TOTAL PAGE

FIRST NUMBER

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

PRINTING

STARTS

FROM SHEET

B C D E F G H I

1/8 2/8 3/8 4/8 5/8 6/8 7/8 8/8

COUNTFRONT

COVER

Not selected

PRINTINGSTARTS

FROM SHEET: 3

Not

1/4

2/4

3/4

4/4

printed printed printed printed printed printed

Printed

contents

when

settings are

changed as

follows

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

Not printed Not printed

3/10

4/10

5/10

1/6

6/10

2/6

7/10

8/10

9/10

10/10

(count)

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

PRINTINGSTARTS

FROM SHEET: 3

Not

printed printed

(count) (count)

3/6

4/6

5/6

6/6

printed printed

When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way.

Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers.

Page number printing during one-sided copying with inserts (4 originals; 5 originals when copying on inserts)

3rd page

Setting

Value

1st page 2nd page

4th page 5th page

(insert)

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

FIRST NUMBER

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

A B C D E

PRINTING STARTS FROM

SHEET

1/4

2/4

3/4

4/4

COUNT INSERTS

Not selected

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 Not printed Not printed Not printed

1/2

4/5

2/2

5/5

Printed contents when

copying on inserts and

settings are changed as

follows

COUNT INSERTS: Selected

1/5

2/5

3/5 (count)

COUNT INSERTS: Selected

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3

Not printed Not printed 1/3 (count)

2/3

4/5

2/3

3/3

5/5

3/3

Not printed

(count)

Printed contents when not

copying on inserts and

settings are changed as

follows

COUNT INSERTS: Selected

1/5

2/5

COUNT INSERTS: Selected

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3

Not printed

(count)

Not printed Not printed

When inserts are not copied on, the page number is not printed.

Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with inserts (one-side copying) (9 originals)

3rd page

1st page

2nd page

4th page

5th page

(insert)

Setting

Value

Front Back

Front

Back

Front Back

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

FIRST NUMBER

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

A B C D E

F G H I

6/8 7/8 8/8

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET

1/8

2/8

3/8

4/8

5/8

COUNT INSERTS Not selected

Printed contents

when settings are

changed as follows Selected

COUNT

INSERTS:

Not

printed

(count)

1/10

2/10

3/10

4/10

5/10

7/10

8/10

9/10

10/10

5-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

ꢁ Printing entered text on copies

Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 50 characters can be printed.

Up to 30 sequences of frequently used text can be stored. See "Storing text sequences" (page 5-39).

NOTE

When the machine is connected to a network, the printed text sequences can be stored and deleted in the Web

page. For details, see Help in the Web page.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-30).

5 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

To edit the selected

text sequence, touch

the [DIRECT ENTRY]

key to display the

character entry screen.

CANCEL

DIRECT ENTRY

1/5

2 ^{Touch the [TEXT] key.}

The

selected

text

LAYOUT

CANCEL

STAMP

sequence is entered.

1/2

DATE

For information on entering characters, see page

7-26. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close

the character entry screen.

PAGE

NUMBERING

TEXT

6 ^{Select the pages to be printed on.}

If you wish to use one of the preset text

sequences, touch the [RECALL] key. To

directly enter the text, touch the [DIRECT

ENTRY] key.

Select whether to print

CANCEL

on only the first page,

or all pages. The

FIRST PAGE

touched

highlighted.

key

ALL PAGES

CANCEL

TEXT

DIRECT ENTRY

FIRST PAGE

PRE-SET

STORE/DELETE

ALL PAGES

RECALL

DIRECT ENTRY

7 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a character

entry screen will appear. For information on

entering characters, see page 7-26. When

finished, click the [OK] key to close the character

entry screen. (Go to step 6.)

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

DIRECT ENTRY

The stored text sequences will appear as

keys. Touch the key of the desired text

sequence.

Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-30).

CANCEL

TEXT

DIRECT ENTRY

1/5

RECALL

No.04

No.05

No.06

No.01 TARO YAMADA

No.02 October, 2004 Meeting

No.03

NOTE

To cancel a text setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the text print screen. (The

screen of step 7.)

The selected text sequence key is highlighted.

If the desired text sequence key does not appear,

change screens with the

key.

The display is initially set to show 6 keys per

screen. This can be changed to 3 keys per screen

by touching the [3 6] key. When 3 keys are

displayed, the entire text sequence will appear in

each key. (When 6 keys are displayed, up to 22

characters appear in each key.

5-38

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Storing text sequences

Editing and deleting stored text

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-30).

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-30).

2 ^{Touch the [TEXT] key.}

LAYOUT

CANCEL

STAMP

CANCEL

STAMP

1/2

DATE

PAGE

NUMBERING

PAGE

NUMBERING

TEXT

3 ^{Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.}

PRE-SET

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

Touch

key that has not been

Touch the text key that you wish to edit or

delete.

programmed (a key in which No. xx

appears).

TEXT

BACK

STORE/DELETE

TEXT

1/5

No.04 Minutes of meeting

No.01 TARO YAMADA

BACK

STORE/DELETE

1/5

No.02 October, 2004 Meeting

No.03

No.05

No.06

No.04

No.05

No.06

No.01 TARO YAMADA

No.02 October, 2004 Meeting

No.03

To edit the text, touch the [AMEND] key. To

delete the text, touch the [DELETE] key.

When touched, the character entry screen

appears. Enter the text (max. 50 characters). For

information on entering characters, see page 7-

26. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the

character entry screen.

When the [AMEND] key is

touched, the character

entry screen appears.

The selected text

sequence is entered. For

information on entering

characters, see page 7-

A TEXT HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED TO

LOCATION.CHANGE THE TEXT?

If no free keys appear, change screens with the

CANCEL

DELETE

No.06

AMEND

key.

5 ^{Touch the [BACK] key.}

26. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the

character entry screen.

If you touch the [DELETE] key, the text will be deleted

and you will return to the screen of step 4.

To cancel editing or deletion, touch the [CANCEL] key.

The entered text is

stored.

BACK

1/5

04 Minutes of meeting

6 ^{Touch the [BACK] key.}

BACK

1/5

04 Minutes of meeting

5-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIAL MODES

Q Checking and changing the print layout

You can check the print layout after the print items have been selected. If needed you can change the print

position or delete print content.

Touch the [LAYOUT] key on the print menu

screen.

4 ^{Touch the key of the new position.}

The selected key is

highlighted and the

print position changes

to the new position.

SELECTED ITEM.

LAYOUT

DATE

CANCEL

STAMP

PAGE

NUMBERING

TEXT

The keys indicating the print position appear as

follows depending on the state of the setting:

Touch the key in which you wish to change

the print position or delete print content.

Print position without any set print

menus.

LAYOUT

TARO YAMADA

CONFIDENTIAL

DO NOT COPY

Currently set print position.

Print position with another competing

print menu set.

1,2,3..

(When moving a stamp, this indicates

that another stamp has been set. When

moving a print menu other than a stamp,

this indicates that the date, page

number, or text has been set.)

NOTE

Up to 14 characters of the print text appears in the

key.

To change the print position, touch the

[MOVE] key. To delete print content, touch

the [DELETE] key.

NOTE

If you wish to swap the contents of two positions,

temporarily move the content of one position to an

unused position and then complete the swap.

If you touched the

[MOVE] key, the new

DO YOU WANT TO MOVE OR DELETE THE

SELECTED ITEM?

position

selection

screen appears.

CANCEL

DELETE

MOVE

1,2,3..

5 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

If you touched the

[DELETE] key, the

print content is deleted.

(Go to step 6.)

If you attempt to move

print content to

position that already

has print content set, a

message will appear

asking you if you wish

overwrite

the

previously set content.

To overwrite the content, touch the [YES] key. To

cancel the move and return to the condition before

the [OK] key was touched, touch the [NO] key.

6 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

CONFIDENTIAL

DO NOT COPY

1,2,3..

5-40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STORING, USING AND DELETING

JOB PROGRAMS

The steps of up to 10 copy jobs can be stored as job programs. Job programs can be called up with ease, and are

retained even when the power is turned off. By storing frequently used copy settings in a job program, you can

eliminate the bother of selecting the settings each time you use them for a copy job.

ꢀIf any settings related to the steps of a job program are changed in the key operator programs after the job program

is stored, the steps related to the changed settings will not be included when the job program is called up.

ꢀTo exit the job programs mode, press the [CA] (clear all) key on the operation panel or touch the [EXIT] key on the

touch panel.

Storing a job program

1 ^{Press the [#/P] key.}

5 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

The selected settings

will be stored in the

number key selected in

step 3.

NCEL

AUTO

ORIGINAL

AUTO

2 ^{Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.}

M NUMBER.

ꢁ If a number key is selected in step 3 that has

already been programmed.

A setting confirmation screen will appear. To replace

the existing program with the new program, touch

the [STORE] key and continue from step 4. If you do

not wish to replace the existing program, touch the

[CANCEL] key to return to the screen of step 3 and

select a different number key.

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

Touch the number key ([1] to [10]) in which

you wish to stored the job program.

Number keys in which

PROGRAMS

job

already

programs

stored

are

NOTE

ESS PROGRAM NUMBER.

If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been

prohibited in the key operator programs, you will not

be able to store a job program. (See page 15 of the

key operator's guide.)

highlighted.

RECALL

STORE/

Select the copy settings that you wish to

store in the job program.

TO STORE, MAKE SELECTIONS AND PRESS

[OK], TO DELETE, PRESS [CANCEL].

The number of copies

cannot be stored.

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

5-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS

Calling up a job program

Set the number of copies if needed and

then press the [START] key.

Copying will begin using

1 ^{Press the [#/P] key.}

the settings of the job

program.

Touch the number key of the desired job

program.

JOB PROGRAMS

The

screen

automatically closes and

the job program is called

up. A number key that

does not have a job

program cannot be

selected.

PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.

RECALL

Deleting a stored job program

1 ^{Press the [#/P] key.}

4 ^{Touch the [DELETE] key.}

The selected program is

A JOB PROGRAM HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED

IN THIS LOCATION.

deleted and you return

to the screen of step 3.

To return to the screen

of step 3 without deleting

the job program, touch

the [CANCEL] key. In

both cases, touch the

CANCEL

RECALL

DELETE

STORE

STORE/DELETE

2 ^{Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.}

[EXIT] key on the screen displayed in the screen of

step 3 to exit the job program mode.

M NUMBER.

NOTE

If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been

prohibited in the key operator programs, you will not

be able to clear a job program. (See page 15 of the

key operator's guide.)

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

Select a storage register number of the

program to be deleted.

EXIT

If a number key for which

no job program has

been stored is selected,

the screen will change to

the screen of step 4 on

STORE/DELETE

the previous page (for

storing a job program).

5-42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN

The copy of the original scanned in interrupt mode is output before the remainder of the interrupted copy job.

Place the original for the interrupt copy job

in the document feeder or on the

document glass (page 4-3).

1 ^{Touch the [INTERRUPT] key.}

If interrupt copying is

INTERRUPT

possible during a copy

run, the [INTERRUPT]

key will appear. (If the

key does not appear,

interrupt copying is not

possible.)

AUTO

ORIGINA

RIGINAL

AUTO

EXPOSUR

AUTO

CANCEL

When the [INTERRUPT]

key is touched in step 1,

the [INTERRUPT] key

will be replaced by the

[CANCEL] key as shown

in the illustration.

AUTO

EXPOSURE

ORIGINAL

8₂x11

Select the exposure mode, paper size,

number of copies, and any other copy

settings as needed, and then press the

[START] key.

AUTO A4

EXPOSURE

AUTO A4

PAPER SELECT

100%

To cancel an interrupt

copy job while the interrupt original is being

scanned or while you are selecting copy settings,

touch the [CANCEL] key.

NOTES

ꢀ If you touch the [INTERRUPT] key when auditing

mode is enabled, the display will prompt you to

enter your account number. Enter your account

number with the numeric keys. The copies you

make will be added to the count of the entered

account number.

The previous copy job automatically

resumes after the interrupt job finishes.

ꢀ If a copy is being printed when the [INTERRUPT]

key is pressed, interrupt mode will begin after the

copy is finished.

ꢀ If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy

job, two-sided copying, sort copying, and staple

sort copying cannot be selected. If any of these

functions are necessary, use the document

feeder.

5-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER 6

MACHINE MAINTENANCE

(FOR COPYING)

This chapter explains procedures for cleaning the machine, and

troubleshooting.

Page

USER MAINTENANCE........................................................................... 6-2

ꢀ

Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document feeder .......6-2

ꢀ

Cleaning the main charger of the photoconductive drum.......................6-2

TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................ 6-3

6-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER MAINTENANCE

Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document feeder

If the document glass, document cover or automatic document scanning unit have dirty spots, these spots will form

lines in scanned images. These will show up as defects when the images are printed. Always keep these parts clean.

Wipe with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, moisten the

cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent.

When finished, wipe dry with a clean cloth. When

cleaning, do not use thinner, benzene, or similar

volatile cleaning agents.

If black or white stripes appear on printed images of originals that were fed through the

automatic document feeder, wipe the long narrow glasses in the scanning unit ((A) and

(A)

(B) in the illustration).

Example of dirty print image

(B)

Black stripes

White stripes

CAUTION

Do not use flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical

components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.

Cleaning the main charger of the photoconductive drum

If black (or white) lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass and document feeder, use the

charger cleaner to clean the main charger that charges the drum.

Switch off the power switch (see page 1-

17).

Once the knob is pulled out, slowly push it

back in.

2 ^{Open the front cover.}

Close the front cover and switch on the

power switch.

Slowly pull out the green knob (charger

cleaner).

Charger cleaner

NOTES

ꢀ If this does not solve the problem, pull the knob out and push it back in 2 more times.

ꢀ When pulling and pushing the knob to clean the charger, pull and push the knob slowly from one end to the other.

6-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you

are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the power switch, and unplug the power cord.

Problems related to the copy function are described below. For problems related to general use of the machine, see

page 2-23.

Problem

Check

Solution

Machine does not Is the [START] key indicator off?

operate.

This indicates that the machine is warming

up (warming up lasts no more than 80

seconds after the power switch is turned on).

Copying is not possible during this time. Wait

until the [START] key light illuminates.

Copies are too dark Is the original image too dark or too light?

or too light.

Select an appropriate exposure mode for the

original being copied and adjust the copy

exposure. (See page 4-14.)

Is the exposure mode set to "AUTO"?

The exposure level for "AUTO" can be

adjusted using the "Exposure adjustment"

key operator program. Contact your key

operator. (See page 14 of the key operator's

guide.)

An appropriate exposure mode for the Change the exposure mode to "AUTO" or

original has not been selected.

manually select an appropriate resolution

setting. (See page 4-14.)

Text is not clear on a An appropriate exposure mode for the Change the exposure mode to "TEXT". (See

copy.

original has not been selected.

page 4-14.)

Smudges appear on Document glass or document cover dirty?

copies.

Clean regularly. (See page 6-2.)

Black lines appear on copies when the Clean the original scanning area. (See page

automatic document feeder is used.

6-2.)

Original smudged or blotchy?

Use a clean original.

Image cannot be Is the auto paper select or auto image Rotation copy functions only if the machine

rotated.

function selected?

is either in the auto paper select mode or in

the auto image mode. (See page 4-15.)

Part of

original Is the original positioned correctly?

Set the original properly. (See page 4-3.)

image is not copied.

Is the copy ratio proper for the original and Use the auto image function to select the

paper sizes?

appropriate copy ratio based on the original

and copy sizes. (See page 4-15.)

Blank copies

Is the original placed correctly?

When using the document glass, place the

original face down.

When using the automatic document feeder,

place original face down. (See page 4-3.)

Order of copies Is the order of originals correct?

incorrect

When using the document glass, place the

originals from the first page one sheet at a

time.

When using the automatic document feeder,

place the originals with the first page down.

Job

needed

cancellation Is a message requesting cancellation of job Press the [CA] key to cancel the current job.

displayed?

6-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER 7

DOCUMENT FILING

FUNCTION

Page

OVERVIEW............................................................................................. 7-2

ꢀ

Document filing function.................................................................. 7-2

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION..................................... 7-4

ꢀ

A look at the operation panel .......................................................... 7-4

ꢀ

Saving files...................................................................................... 7-4

ꢀ

Main screen of document filing ....................................................... 7-5

ꢀ

Document filing icons...................................................................... 7-5

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE.................................................... 7-6

ꢀ

Quick File ........................................................................................ 7-6

ꢀ

Filing................................................................................................ 7-7

ꢀ

Print jobs ......................................................................................... 7-9

ꢀ

Scan Save....................................................................................... 7-10

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE.......................................................... 7-13

ꢀ

Searching for and calling up a saved file ........................................ 7-13

ꢀ

Calling up and using a saved file .................................................... 7-15

CUSTOM SETTINGS ............................................................................. 7-21

ꢀ

Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders.................. 7-21

ENTERING CHARACTERS.................................................................... 7-26

TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................ 7-28

7-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OVERVIEW

Document filing function

This function can only be used on the d-Copia 315 Network version, or when the document filling function has been added.

The document filing function allows you to save a document image in the machine's hard disk as a data file. The

image can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed.

The scanned document image is saved when printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or

image send mode ("QUICK FILE" or "FILE"). A document can also be scanned and saved without being printed,

copied, or transmitted ("scan save").

To allow you to search for the file and call it up, names (user name, file name, etc.) can be assigned to the file (except

when using Quick File in copy mode or fax/image send mode).

■ Data flow

Printing in copy mode (Quick

File saving, page 7-6)

Machine hard disk

Printing from a computer (printer

data, page 7-9)

Call up a saved

file to reuse it.

Save to machine's

hard disk

Transmission in fax/image send

mode (filing, page 7-7)

HDD

Send

(facsimile expansion kit

or network scanner

expansion kit required)

and

Scanning a document only

(scan save, page 7-10)

Machine hard disk

QUICK FILE FOLDER

Data is saved by job

MAIN FOLDER

CUSTOM FOLDER

A user name and file name can

be specified for each file and

the file saved to a folder with

any desired name assigned.

A user name and file name is

specified for each saved job

A password

Folder 1

A password

can be set

File 1

File 2

File 1

File 2

can be set

Folder 2

A password

can be set

Folder 3

File 1

File 2

●A stored file can be moved to a different folder under certain conditions (page 7-19).

7-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OVERVIEW

ꢁ Quick File folder

When [QUICK FILE FOLDER] is selected in the main screen of any of the modes, the file is saved in this folder.

Up to 1000 files can be saved in the Quick File folder. All files in the Quick File Folder can be deleted using a key

operator program. If you have a file that you do not want deleted, set the file attribute to [PROTECT] (up to 500 files

can be protected). (See [Property change] on page 7-18)

The following user and file names are automatically assigned (except when using Quick File in copy mode or fax/

image send mode):

User name : User unknown

File name (example) : COPY_10012004_014050PM (job mode and month, day, year, hour, minute, second, AM/

PM of save). (In the example, the file was saved on 10/1/2004 at 13:40 and 50 sec in copy mode.)

When saved, jobs are classified by mode. A saved job can be called up from the COMPLETE job status screen.

ꢁ Main folder

When saving a file, a previously stored user name (see [CUSTOM SETTINGS] on page 7-21) can be specified and

any file name can be assigned.

A password can also be set for a saved file ([CONFIDENTIAL] save). (See [Property change] on page 7-18.)

If a user name and file name are not selected, a name in the same format as Quick File is automatically assigned.

ꢁ Custom folder

Up to 500 folders (named as desired) can be created in this folder. When saving a file in one of these folders, a

previously stored user name (see [CUSTOM SETTINGS] on page 7-21) can be specified and any file name can be

assigned.

A password can be set for a file saved in one of these folders.

ꢁ Attributes of saved files

The protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being

moved or automatically or manually deleted.

Three attributes are available for saved files: [SHARING], [PROTECT], and [CONFIDENTIAL]. When saved with

the [SHARING] attribute, a file is not protected. When saved with the [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, a

file is protected.

Files saved to the Quick File folder are all [SHARING]. When saving a file to the main folder or a custom folder,

[SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] can be selected.

ꢀ A [SHARING] file can be changed to a [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL] file using [Property change] (page 7-18).

ꢀ A password is set for a [CONFIDENTIAL] file to protect it. (The password must be entered to call up the file.)

ꢀ A password cannot be set for a [PROTECT] file, however, as long as the file is not changed to [SHARING] with

[PROPERTY CHANGE], the file will be protected.

CAUTION

ꢀ Documents saved with [QUICK FILE] are shared files that can be called up by anyone and printed or transmitted.

For this reason, do not use Quick File for sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be reused

by others.

ꢀ When saving a document with [FILE], set the attribute to [CONFIDENTIAL] and set a password to prevent others

from reusing the document.

ꢀ Even when a file is saved with the [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, the attribute can be changed afterward to

[SHARING] using [Property change] (page 7-18). For this reason, do not save sensitive documents or

documents that you do not want to be reused by others.

ꢀ Except in cases provided for by law, Olivetti S.p.A. bears no responsibility for any damages that result

from the leaking of sensitive information due to 1) manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick

File function or filing function, or 2) incorrect operation of the Quick File function or filing function by the operator

that saves the data.

7-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION

A look at the operation panel

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(4) Numeric keys

(1) Touch panel (see the next page)

This displays messages and keys. Keys can be

touched to select and enter settings.

Use these keys to enter a password or a numeric

value for a setting.

When a key is touched, a beep will sound and the

key will be highlighted to indicate that it is selected.

When a key cannot be selected in a screen, it will

be greyed out. If touched, a warning beep will

sound to alert you that it cannot be selected.

(5) [C] key (clear key)

Use this key if you make a mistake when entering a

password or numeric setting.

This key is also used to cancel scanning of a

document.

(2) Mode select keys

(6) [CA] key (Clear all key)

Use this key to select the mode.

Use this key to cancel a setting procedure and

return to the main screen. The key is also used to

cancel a special function.

(3) [DOCUMENT FILING] key

Touch this key to display the main screen of

document filing mode.

(7) [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key

Use this key to store, edit or delete a user name or

custom folder.

Saving files

To save files to the main folder or custom folders, a user name must be previously stored. To create a folder in the

custom folder, the folder name must be stored. These settings are configured in the custom settings.

Follow the procedures explained in "Programming a user name", "Editing and deleting a user name", "Creating a

custom folder", and "Editing/deleting a custom folder" on pages 7-22 to 7-25.

7-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION

Main screen of document filing

To display the main screen of document filing, press

the [DOCUMENT FILING] key when the touch panel

shows the copy mode screen, image send mode, or the

job status screen.

Document filing icons

Main

icon

Icon of

confidential protected

file or folder file

Icon of

Meaning

The main screen shows messages, keys, and items

that can be selected for document filing.

Folder

(1)

(2)

(3)

Copy job file

HDD STATUS

Print job file

(including direct

print jobs)

FILE STORE

SCAN TO HDD

FILE RETRIEVE

FILE FOLDER

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

Fax transmission

job file

PC-FAX

(4)

(5)

(6)

transmission job

file

(1) Message display

Displays messages.

Internet

fax

(2) [HDD STATUS] key

transmission job

file

Touch to check the use of the machine's hard disk.

(3) [SEARCH] key

PC-Internet fax

transmission job

file

Touch to search for a file by user name, file name,

or folder name.

(4) [SCAN TO HDD] key

Scan save file

Touch to select scan save. Scan save is used to

save the image file of a scanned document in the

main folder or a custom folder without printing or

transmitting the document.

E-mail

transmission job

file

(5) [FILE FOLDER] key

Touch to call up a file from the main folder or the

custom folder. When the key is touched, the files in

the main folder or the folders in the custom folder

appear.

FTP

transmission job

file

Desktop

transmission job

file

(6) [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key

Touch to call up a file from the Quick File folder.

When the key is touched, the files in the Quick File

folder appear.

The following icons may appear added to a main icon

or alone.

Icon

Meaning

Confidential file or folder

Protected file

NOTE

When the file of a job that was saved using scan

save is printed in job settings, the icon of the job is

highlighted.

7-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

Quick File

When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or fax/image transmission mode, "QUICK

FILE" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder.

The image can be called up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate

the original.

NOTE

As an example, the procedure for saving a document to the Quick File folder while copying using the automatic

document feeder is explained below.

Place the originals in the document feeder

tray and select resolution and exposure

settings.

The saved image can be called up from the

Quick File folder or the job status screen.

AUTO

ꢀTo call the image up from the Quick File

folder, see "Calling up and using a saved file"

on page 7-15.

ꢀTo call the job up from the finished job status

screen, see "Calling up and manipulating a

file from the job status screen" on page 7-20.

See steps 1 to 8 of

"Making copies with the

automatic document

feeder" on pages 4-7 to

4-8 and "ADJUSTING

THE EXPOSURE" on

page 4-14.

ORIGINAL

AUTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO A4

The following operations can be

performed on the image that was called up

in step 4.

Touch the [QUICK FILE] key in the main

screen.

The [QUICK FILE] key

will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

ꢀPrint the image (page 7-16)

ꢀTransmit the image (page 7-17)

ꢀChange the attribute (page 7-18)

ꢀMove the image (page 7-19)

ꢀDelete the image (page 7-19)

ꢀCheck details on the image (page 7-19)

FILE

is selected.

If the [FILE] key is

QUICK FILE

greyed out, only the

[QUICK FILE] key can

be selected.

When you touch the [QUICK FILE] key, a

message asking you to confirm the save will

appear. Touch the [OK] key in the message

screen and go to the next step.

If you wish to cancel the save, touch the [QUICK

FILE] key after touching the [OK] key so that the

[QUICK FILE] key is no longer highlighted.

Press the [START] key on the operation

panel.

To prevent accidental

saving of the document,

the

SCANNED DATA IS

STORED IN THE

warning

"THE

QUICK FILE FOLDER."

appears for 6 seconds

after the [START] key is pressed.

When copying begins, the image is saved.

7-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

Filing

When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or image send mode, "FILE" can be selected

to save an image of the document to the main folder or a previously created custom folder. The image can be called

up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the original.

NOTE

As an example, the procedure for using the filing function while copying using the automatic document feeder is

explained below.

Place the originals in the document feeder

5 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

tray and select resolution and exposure

settings.

The touched user name is selected and you return to the

screen of step 3. The selected user name appears.

AUTO

See steps 1 to 8 of

ORIGINAL

"Making copies with the

automatic document

feeder" on pages 4-7 to

4-8 and "ADJUSTING

THE EXPOSURE" on

page 4-14

NOTE

If you do not select a user name, the following name

is automatically selected:

Example : User unknown

AUTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO A4

6 ^{Touch the [FILE NAME] key.}

2 ^{Touch the [FILE] key in the main screen.}

USER NAME

FILE NAME

STORED TO:

A character entry screen

appears. Enter a file

name (maximum of 30

characters). (See page

COPY

MAI

An information entry

screen appears.

FILE

7-26

enter

characters.)

QUICK FILE

NOTE

If you do not enter a file name, a file name in the

following format is automatically assigned:

Auto generated file name : Month, day, year, hour,

minute, second, AM/PM

3 ^{Touch the [USER NAME] key.}

CONFIDENTIAL

(Example : COPY_10012004_014050PM)

USER NAME

7 ^{Touch the [STORED TO:] key.}

FILE NAME

COPY

MAI

USER NAME

STORED TO:

COPY

MAIN

FILE NAME

Touch the desired user name in the list of

user names that appears.

STORED TO:

1/1

Suzuki

Sasaki

Nakata

Hasegawa

Touch the desired folder name in the list of

folder names that appears

Ono

Yamada

ALL USERS

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST UVWXYZ

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

1/2

User names must be previously stored

("Programming a user name" on page 7-22).

ALL FOLDERS

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRS

UVWXY

Folder names must be previously stored.

("Creating a custom folder" on page 7-24). If a

password has been set for the folder, a password

entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit

password for the folder.

7-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

You will return to the screen of step 10.

The set password is displayed with " ".

9 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

The touched folder is

FOLDER

selected and you return

to the screen of step 7.

The selected folder

name is displayed.

CANCEL

PASSWORD

2/2

XYYY

If needed, select the [CONFIDENTIAL]

checkbox (only in copy mode).

When this is selected, the

15^{Touch the [OK] key.}

You will return to the main screen.

file is stored with the

attribute [CONFIDENTIAL].

To call up the file, the

password that will be set in

the following steps must be

entered.

FILE INFORMATION

Press the [START] key on the operation

panel.

CONFIDENTIAL

When copying begins,

the image is saved.

USER NAME

FILE NAME

ꢀIf you selected the [CONFIDENTIAL]

checkbox, touch the [PASSWORD] key and

enter a password.

ꢀIf you did not select the [CONFIDENTIAL]

checkbox, go to step 16. The file will be saved

as a [SHARING] file.

The saved image can be called up using

the file name, folder name, or user name,

or from the filing folder.

11^{Touch the [PASSWORD] key.}

ꢀTo call up the image by entering the file name,

folder name, or user name, see "Searching

for and calling up a saved file" on page 7-13.

ꢀTo call up the image from the filing folder, see

"Calling up and using a saved file" on page 7-

15.

The password entry

screen appears.

CAN

PASSWORD

XYYY

The following operations can be

performed on the image that was called

up:

Enter a 5-digit password with the numeric

keys.

As each digit is entered,

ꢀPrint the image (page 7-16)

-" changes to " ".

CANCEL

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

ꢀTransmit the image (page 7-17)

ꢀChange the attribute (page 7-18)

ꢀMove the image (page 7-19)

ꢀDelete the image (page 7-19)

ꢀCheck details on the image (page 7-19)

13^{Touch the [OK] key.}

CANCEL

10-KEY PAD.

7-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

Print jobs

Print jobs sent to the machine using the machine's

printer driver can be saved in the main folder or a

previously created custom folder when printed. The

saved print data can be called up and printed or

transmitted without having to open the original file on

your computer.

Touch the key of the folder that contains

the desired file.

CUSTOM FOLDER

MAIN FOLDER

If a password is set for

the selected folder, a

password entry screen

will appear. Enter the 5-

digit password with the

numeric keys.

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTO

This section gives an overview of this function and

explains the procedure for printing from the operation

panel of the machine.

For the procedures that are performed at your

computer when initiating printing such as selecting the

save location and file attribute, see the printer driver

Help file.

ALL FOLDERS

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN OPQRS

Touch the printer icon ( ) tab and then

touch the key of the desired file.

CUSTOM FOLDER

BACK

MAIN FOLDER

FILE NAME

Basic

USER NAME

DATE

1/1

2004/10/01

Yamada

Sato

ꢁ Using a print job file (printing,

presentation

Product

deleting, transmitting, etc.)

Akata

PRINTS

Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the

operation panel.

The following screen appears if the [QUICK FILE

FOLDER] key is touched in step 2.

BACK

QUICK FILE FOLDER

FILE NAME

USER NAME

DATE

2004/10/01

Tanaka7890123456

Suzuki7890123456

User unknown

PRINTS

Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the

[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on

where the file is saved.

Touch the key of the file that you wish to call up. A

menu screen will appear.

If a password is set for the file, a password entry

screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with

the numeric keys.

FILE RETRIEVE

FILE FOLDER

Touch the key of the operation that you

wish to perform.

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

(1)

(2)

(3)

CANCEL

JOB SETTINGS

ꢀTouch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is

saved in the main folder or the custom folder.

Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the

file is saved in the Quick File folder.

Basic specifications

SELECT THE JOB.

Yamada Taro

PROPERTY

CHANGE

SEND

MOVE

DELETE

DETAIL

If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the

files in the main folder or the folders in the

custom folder appear. If you open the wrong

folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the

[CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the

correct folder.

ꢀIf the desired file is saved in the main folder,

go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a

custom folder, go to step 3.

(4)

(5)

(6)

(1) [PRINT] key (see page 7-16)

(2) [SEND] key (see page 7-17)

(3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-18)

(4) [MOVE] key (see page 7-19)

(5) [DELETE] key (see page 7-19)

(6) [DETAIL] key (see page 7-19)

ꢀIf you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER]

key, the files in the Quick File folder appear.

Go to step 4.

The setting screen of the selected operation

appears. See the indicated page.

7-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

Scan Save

Scan save is used to save a scanned document image in the main folder or the custom folder without copying or transmitting it.

Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the

operation panel.

Perform any of the following steps 7 to 16

as needed. When finished, go to step 17 on

page 7-11.

ꢀTo set the original size, perform steps 7 to 10.

ꢀTo set the resolution, perform steps 11 to 13

on page 7-11

ꢀTo select the exposure, perform steps 14 to

16 on page 7-11

ꢀIf you no not wish to select any of the above

settings, go to step 17 on page 7-11.

2 ^{Touch the [SCAN TO HDD] key.}

FILE STORE

7 ^{Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.}

SCAN TO HDD

300x300dpi

RESOLUTION

AUTO

ORIGINAL

3 ^{Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.}

special

Select

any

functions that you wish

to use (otherwise skip

this step).

To set the original size, see "Manually

setting the scanning size" on page 4-5.

SPECIAL MODES

FILE

INFORMATION

When the [SPECIAL

MODES] key is touched,

If the original is two-sided, touch the [2-

SIDED BOOKLET] key or the [2-SIDED

TABLET] key depending on where the

pages are bound.

the

special

modes

selection screen appears. (See "Using special

functions for scan save." on page 7-12.)

SCAN SIZE

AUTO

STORE SIZ

AUTO

NOTE

100%

For explanations of the special functions, see page

7-12 and chapter 5.

2-SIDED

BOOKLET

2-SIDED

TABLET

4 ^{Touch the [FILE INFORMATION] key.}

SPECIAL MODES

10^{Touch the [OK] key.}

FILE

INFORMATION

You will return to the

screen of step 7.

STORE SIZE

AUTO

The screens for selecting the user name, file

name, folder, and attribute appear. Configure the

settings as explained in step 3 to step 15 on

pages 7-7 to 7-8. When step 15 is completed, you

will return to the main screen of document filing.

IDED

NOTE

FILE STORE

SCAN TO HDD

FILE RETRIEVE

FILE FOLDER

If the original pages are bound at the side, the

document is a "booklet". If the original pages are

bound at the top, the document is a "tablet".

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

7-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

11^{Touch the [RESOLUTION] key.}

16^{Touch the [OK] key.}

You will return to the

screen of step 14.

AUTO

EXPOSURE

300x300dpi

RESOLUTION

MANUAL

AUTO

ORIGINAL

Place the original and touch the [START]

key.

12^{Touch the key of the desired resolution.}

PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.

SCAN TO HDD

200x200dpi

AUTO

[Placing the original]

ꢀFor information on placing the original, see

EXPOSURE

300x300dpi

"NORMAL COPYING" in chapter 4.

400x400dpi

600x600dpi

HALF TONE

ꢀIf you selected the "Card Shot" special function,

the document glass must be used.

ꢀIf you selected job build mode, the automatic

document feeder must be used.

RESOLUTION

AUTO

ORIGINAL

Select one of four resolution levels as appropriate

for the original.

Scanning begins.

If you are using the

document glass, touch

the [READ-END] key

after all pages have

been scanned.

The selected resolution key is highlighted.

13^{Touch the [OK] key.}

You will return to the

screen of step 11.

NOTE

This completes the scan save procedure. Follow the

steps below when you wish to call up the image and

print or transmit it.

HALF TONE

14^{Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.}

The saved image can be called up using

the file name, folder name, or user name,

or from the filing folder.

AUTO

EXPOSURE

ꢀTo call up the image by entering the file name,

folder name, or user name, see "Searching

for and calling up a saved file" on page 7-13.

ꢀTo call up the image from the filing folder, see

"Calling up and using a saved file" on page 7-

15.

300x300dpi

RESOLUTION

AUTO

ORIGINAL

15^{Select [AUTO] or [MANUAL].}

The following operations can be

To have the exposure

adjusted automatically,

select [AUTO].

performed on the image that was called up

AUTO

MANUAL

in step 18:

ꢀPrint the image (page 7-16)

ꢀTransmit the image (page 7-17)

ꢀChange the attribute (page 7-18)

ꢀMove the image (page 7-19)

ꢀDelete the image (page 7-19)

ꢀCheck details on the image (page 7-19)

[MANUAL], touch the

or key to adjust

you

selected

MANUAL

the exposure.

(For a darker image, touch

the

key. For a lighter

key.)

image, touch the

7-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

ꢁ Using special functions for scan save.

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main scan save screen to display the special modes screen.

The functions below can be selected in this screen.

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES]

key in the main screen.

READY TO SCAN TO HDD.

PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.

SCAN TO HDD

BACK

AUTO

EXPOSURE

300x300dpi

RESOLUTION

SPECIAL MODES

FILE

AUTO

INFORMATION

ORIGINAL

(1)

(2)

(3)

[READY TO SCAN TO HDD.

PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.

SPECIAL MODES

DUAL PAGE

SCAN

1 2

ERASE

2in1

JOB

BUILD

CARD SHOT

(4)

(5)

(1) [ERASE] key (see page 5-4)

(4) [JOB BUILD] key (see page 5-8)

Use this function to erase shadows that can appear

around the edges of the image when books and

other thick originals are scanned.

When you have more pages than can be placed in

the document feeder at once, this function allows

you to scan the pages in sets.

(2) [DUAL PAGE SCAN] key (see page 5-5)

(Equivalent to Dual page copy in copy mode)

(5) [CARD SHOT] key (see page 5-26)

This function allows you to save the front and back

side of a card on a single page (instead of saving

each side as a separate file).

This function is used to save the opened pages of

a book in order one page at a time (left page then

right page).

(3) [2in1] key (see page 5-23

)

(When the fax or network scanner option is

installed, this is equivalent to the 2in1 function

described in the fax and network scanner

manuals. It is also equivalent to the "Multi shot"

function in copy mode; however, only 2in1 is

possible for scan save.)

This function reduces two original pages and

arranges the images on a single page in a uniform

layout.

7-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

Searching for and calling up a saved file

When calling up a file, you can enter the file name, folder name, or user name to quickly search for the file.

To search for a file, touch the [SEARCH] key in the main screen of document filing mode or in a screen that shows

folders or files in a folder. A data search screen will appear.

ꢁ Procedure for searching for a file

Touch the [SEARCH] key in the main

screen of document filing mode or in a

screen that shows folders or files in a

folder.

Touch the one-touch key of the user name

that you wish to use to search for the file.

If you wish to directly enter the user name,

touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key.

you

touch

the

CANCEL

SELECT USER NAME.

Suzuki

ATUS

[SEARCH] key in the

screen that shows the

folders in the custom

folder or a screen that

shows the files in a

folder, the [SEARCH

Sasaki

Nakata

Yamada

Hasegawa

Ono

FILE RETRIEVE

FILE FOLDER

DIRECT ENTRY

ALL USERS

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST UVWXYZ

ꢀThe selected user name is highlighted.

ꢀIf you select the wrong user name, touch the

key of the correct name.

WITHIN CURRENT FOLDER] checkbox will

appear. Select this checkbox to search for a file

only in the selected folder.

ꢀIf you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a

character entry screen will appear. Enter the

user name.

See page 7-26 for the procedure for entering

characters.

In the data search screen, select whether

you will search by [USER NAME] or [FILE

OR FOLDER NAME].

SEARCH START

CANCEL

5 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

USER NAME

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

You will return to the

screen of step 2 and the

selected user name will

appear.

CANCEL

ꢀ

To search by user name, follow steps 3 to 6.

ꢀTo search by file name or folder name,

perform step 8.

DIRECT ENTRY

ꢀTo stop searching, touch the [CANCEL]key.

6 ^{Touch the [SEARCH START] key.}

[Searching by user name]

SEARCH START

CANCEL

3 ^{Touch the [USER NAME] key.}

SEARCH START

CANCEL

USER NAME

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

7-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

The results of the user name search

appear. Touch the desired file name or

folder name.

The results of the file or folder name

search appear. Touch the desired file

name or folder name.

CANCEL

SEARCH AGAIN

CANCEL

SEARCH AGAIN

DATE

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

USER NAME

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

USER NAME

2004/10/20

Product SpecA

Product B

Suzuki

Tanaka

Kondou

Product specifications

Products

Yamada

Sato

2003/12/30

Product 2

Product_info

Akata

ꢀSee page 7-5 for a list of the document filing

icons.

ꢀSee page 7-5 for a list of the document filing

icons.

ꢀWhen a file name is touched, the operation

selection screen appears. (To perform an

operation using the file, go to step 5 on

page 7-16.)

ꢀWhen a file name is touched, the operation

selection screen appears. (To perform an

operation using the file, go to step 5 on

page 7-16.)

ꢀWhen a folder name is touched, all files in the

folder are displayed. Touch the desired file.

(To perform an operation using the file, go

to step 5 on page 7-16.)

ꢀWhen a folder name is touched, all files in the

folder are displayed. Touch the desired file.

(To perform an operation using the file, go

to step 5 on page 7-16.)

ꢀTo change the order of file display, touch the

[FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER

NAME] key, or [DATE] key.

ꢀTo change the order of file display, touch the

[FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER

NAME] key, or [DATE] key.

If you touch a file name or folder name that

has a password, a password entry screen will

appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the

numeric keys.

If you touch a file name or folder name that

has a password, a password entry screen will

appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the

numeric keys.

[Searching by file or folder name]

8 ^{Touch the [FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key.}

A character entry screen

USER NAME

appears. Enter the file

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

name or folder name to

be used for the search.

See page 7-26 to enter

characters.

9 ^{Touch the [SEARCH START] key.}

SEARCH START

CANCEL

7-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

Calling up and using a saved file

A file saved with the document filing function can be called up and printed or manipulated as needed.

The following operations can be performed:

ꢀ [Print] : Print the file (page 7-16).

ꢀ [Send] : Transmit the saved file (page 7-17). The file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, fax, or

Internet fax. (All of these methods require installation of the appropriate options.) (Page 1-11)

ꢀ [Property change] : Change the attribute of the saved file (page 7-18).

ꢀ [Move] : Move the file (page 7-19)

ꢀ [Delete] : Delete the file (page 7-19)

ꢀ [Detail] : Show details on the saved file (page 7-19).

ꢁ General procedure for using a saved file

Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the

operation panel.

Touch the key of the folder that contains

the desired file.

CUSTOM FOLDER

MAIN FOLDER

BACK

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

1/1

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

ALL FOLDERS

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

If there are more custom folder keys than can

Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the

[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on

where the file is saved.

appear in one screen, touch the

to change screens.

keys

If a password is set for the selected folder, a

password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-

digit password with the numeric keys.

FILE RETRIEVE

FILE FOLDER

4 ^{Touch the desired file key.}

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

CUSTOM FOLDER

DATE

BACK

MAIN FOLDER

FILE NAME

USER NAME

2003/10/20

Basic specifications

Yamada

Sato

ꢀTouch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is

saved in the main folder or the custom folder.

Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the

file is saved in the Quick File folder.

If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the

files in the main folder or the folders in the

custom folder appear. If you open the wrong

folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the

[CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the

correct folder.

presentaion_0903

Product_info

COPY

Akata

ꢀIf the desired file is saved in the main folder,

go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a

custom folder, go to step 3.

ꢀIf you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER]

key, the files in the Quick File folder appear.

Go to step 4.

7-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

(1) [PRINT] key (see below)

Touch the key of the operation that you

wish to perform.

(2) [SEND] key (see page 7-17)

(3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-18)

(4) [MOVE] key (see page 7-19)

(5) [DELETE] key (see page 7-19)

(6) [DETAIL] key (see page 7-19)

(1)

(2)

(3)

CANCEL

JOB SETTINGS

Basic specifications

SELECT THE JOB.

Yamada Taro

PROPERTY

CHANGE

SEND

The setting screen of the selected operation

appears. See the indicated page.

MOVE

DELETE

DETAIL

(4)

(5)

(6)

ꢁ [Print]

A saved file can be printed.

The screen below appears when the [PRINT] key is selected in the operation selection screen. To begin printing,

touch the [PRINT] (7) key. Printing settings can be selected in this screen before printing. The settings that were

in effect when the file was saved appear initially. The settings can be changed as needed.

NOTES

ꢀ When print settings are changed with this procedure, only the value for the number of copies is overwritten.

ꢀ The printing speed will be slower for image files saved using certain resolution settings. (See page 7-28.)

(3)

(2)

(1)

CANCEL

JOB SETTINGS / PRINT

Basic specifications

AUTO

Yamada Taro

NUMBER OF PRINTS

PAPER SELECT

PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA

PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA

(1~999)

OUTPUT

2-SIDED

TANDEM PRINT

SPECIAL MODES

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(1) [PAPER SELECT] key

(4) [TANDEM PRINT] key

Use this key to set the paper size.

If the conditions for tandem printing are met (page

5-9), touch this key to enable tandem printing. See

page 5-9 for more information.

(2) [OUTPUT] key

Use this key to select sort, group or staple sort

functions, and to select the output tray.

When printing a file that was saved in copy mode,

this key changes to the [SPECIAL MODES] key.

The [SPECIAL MODES] include [PRINT MENU]

and [TANDEM PRINT]. For information on the print

menu, see page 5-29.

(3) [2-SIDED] key

When performing two-sided printing, use this key

to select the orientation of the image on the back

side of the paper. To have the front and back

images oriented in the same direction, touch the [2-

SIDED BOOKLET] key. To have the front and back

images oriented opposite to each other, touch the

[2-SIDED TABLET] key. Note that the size and

orientation of the saved image may cause these

keys to have the opposite effect. If neither key is

selected, one-sided printing will take place.

To perform two-sided printing, the optional duplex

module is necessary.

(5) [NUMBER OF PRINTS] setting key

Use this key to set the number of copies.

(6) [PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA] key

Touch this key to print a file and then have it

automatically deleted.

(7) [PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA] key

Touch this key to print a file. The file will not be

automatically deleted after printing.

7-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

ꢁ [Send]

A saved file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, fax, or Internet fax.

These transmission methods require installation of the appropriate options.

The following screen appears when the [SEND] key is touched. Select the destination and other settings required

for transmission and then touch the [SEND] (10) key to transmit the file. Transmission settings include the

resolution and transmission functions such as a timer setting. Change or select these settings as needed.

NOTE

Jobs that use the following special functions cannot be transmitted when called up. (The [SEND] key is greyed out

in the operation selection screen.)

Pamphlet copying, covers/insert, card shot, Multi shot.

Jobs that use the following functions can be transmitted with certain restrictions when called up:

Card shot:Can be transmitted if saved by scan save or image send.

Multi shot (2in1):Can be transmitted if saved as 2in1 using a portrait original.

[Example of E-MAIL/FTP mode]

(4)

(5)

(6)

READY TO SEND

CANCEL

200x200dpi

RESOLUTION

E-MAIL/FTP

MODE SWITCH

ADDRESS BOOK

(7)

(1)

(2)

(8)

(9)

PDF NONE

FILE FORMAT

ADDRESS REVIEW

SPECIAL MODES

ADDRESS ENTRY

SEND SETTINGS

Basic specifications

Yamada Taro

(3)

SEND

(10)

(12)

(11)

(1) [RESOLUTION] key

(8) [ADDRESS REVIEW] key

Use this key to set the resolution.

Touch this key to display the destinations.

The resolution is set when performing Scan to E-

mail/FTP and the resolution is set when performing

a fax or Internet fax transmission.

(9) [SPECIAL MODES] key

Touch this key to display the special function

menu. The functions that can be selected vary

depending on the transmission mode:

ꢀ Scan to E-mail/FTP

TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.

ꢀ FAX

(2) [FILE FORMAT] key

[FILE FORMAT] key is displayed in E-mail/FTP

mode. Touch this key to set the file format of scan

images that you transmit.

TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.

FAX OWN ADDRESS SENDING: Your sender's

information can be included on the fax pages

printed out by the receiving machine.

TRANSACTION REPORT: A transaction report

can be printed based on the specified conditions

after a transaction ends.

(3) [FILE NAME/USER NAME] display

This shows the file name and user name of the file

to be transmitted.

(4) [

] key (Speed dial key)

Use this key to specify a destination by entering the

3-digit number that is assigned to an e-mail

address or fax number when it is stored in a one-

touch key or group key.

ꢀ Internet FAX

TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.

I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND: Your sender's

information can be included on the Internet fax

pages printed out by the receiving machine.

TRANSACTION REPORT: A transaction report

can be printed based on the specified conditions

after a transaction ends.

(5) [MODE SWITCH] key

Use this key to select the transmission mode (Scan

to E-mail/FTP, fax, or Internet fax).

(6) [CANCEL] key

Touch this key to return to the operation selection

screen.

(10) [SEND] key

(7) [ADDRESS BOOK] key

Touch this key to display the destinations stored in

the directory.

Touch this key after selecting transmission settings

to begin transmission. (The [START] key can also

be pressed to begin transmission.)

7-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

(11) [SEND SETTINGS] key

(12) [SUB ADDRESS] key or [ADDRESS ENTRY] key

ꢀ Touch this key to directly enter the destination

for a Scan to E-mail/FTP or Internet fax

transmission, .

[SEND SETTINGS] key is displayed in E-mail/FTP

mode and Internet FAX mode.

Touch this key to set the subject and file name. In

E-mail/FTP mode, sender name can also be set.

ꢀ Touch this key to enter the sub-address and

passcode for an F-code fax transmission.

NOTE

See the "Operation manual (for facsimile)" and "Operation manual (for network scanner)" for detailed explanations

of (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7), (8), (9), (11), and (12).

ꢁ [Property change]

Select this operation to change the attribute of a saved file. Three attributes are available: [SHARING],

[PROTECT], and [ CONFIDENTIAL].

The following screen appears when the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key is selected in the operation selection

screen. Note the restrictions below on changing the attribute.

[Restrictions on changing the attribute]

CANCEL

JOB SETTINGS / PROPERTY CHANGE

Basic specifications

ꢀA file that is set to [SHARING] can be

changed to [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL].

However, a [SHARING] file that is saved in

the Quick File folder can only be changed to

[PROTECT].

Yamada Taro

SHARING

PROTECT

CONFIDENTIAL

PASSWORD

ꢀA file that is set to [PROTECT] can be

changed to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL].

However, a [PROTECT] file that is saved in

the Quick File folder can only be changed to

[SHARING].

ꢀA file that is saved in the Quick File folder

cannot be changed to [CONFIDENTIAL].

3 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

Touch the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key in

the operation selection screen.

PROPERTY

CHANGE

NCEL

DETAIL

2 ^{Touch the key of the desired attribute.}

SHARING

If you are changing a

[SHARING]

[PROTECT]

file

CONFIDENTIAL

[CONFIDENTIAL],

touch the [PASSWORD]

key and enter the

password.

PROTECT

PASSWORD

7-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

ꢁ [Move]

ꢁ [Delete]

This operation is used to move a file to a different

This operation is used to delete the selected file.

Touch the [DELETE] key in the operation select

screen. A message asking you to confirm the

deletion will appear. Touch the [YES] key to delete

the file.

folder.

The following screen appears when the [MOVE]

key is selected.

Only [SHARING] and [CONFIDENTIAL] files can

be moved. A [PROTECT] file can be moved by first

using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the

attribute to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL].

Only [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] files can be

deleted. (A [PROTECT] file can be deleted by first

using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the

attribute to [SHARING].)

CANCEL

JOB SETTINGS / MOVE

Basic specifications

Yamada Taro

ꢁ [Detail]

SELECT THE FOLDER THE FILE IS MOVED TO.

This operation is used to show detailed information

on the selected file.

Touch the [DETAIL] key to display the information.

The information appears on two screens. Touch

FILE NAME

MOVE TO:

Basic specifications

MOVE

the

key or

key to move between the two

screens.

Touch the [MOVE TO:] key and select the

folder to which you wish to move the file.

ꢀSelect the main folder or a folder in the

custom folder. A file cannot be moved to the

Quick File folder.

The file name can be changed in the information

screen. To change the name, touch the [FILE

NAME] key and enter the desired file name in the

character entry screen that appears. See page 7-

26 for the procedure for entering characters.

ꢀThe file name can be changed when moving a

file. To change the name, touch the [FILE

NAME] key and enter the desired file name.

See page 7-26 for the procedure for entering

characters.

2 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

N FOLDER

3 ^{Touch the [MOVE] key.}

amada Taro

OVED TO.

ations

MOVE

4 ^{Touch the [CANCEL] key.}

You will return to the

CANCEL

operation

screen.

selection

aro

7-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

ꢁ Calling up and manipulating a file from the job status screen

Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE" functions appear as keys in the finished job status screen.

You can view information on a file that appears in this screen and manipulate the file.

To view information on the file, touch the

[DETAIL] key.

1 ^{Press the [JOB STATUS] key.}

The job status screen

Use the

keys

appears.

to change screens.

DETAIL

When you are finished,

touch the [OK] key to

return to the screen of step

CALL

2 ^{Touch the [COMPLETE] key.}

DETAIL OF

COPY

The finished job screen

FILE NAME:

COPY_20041021_153050

CALL

1/2

JOB QUEUE

appears.

SIZE:A4

RESOLUTION:600x600dpi

1/8

COMPLETE

DATE:2004/10/10 15:30

PAGES:10

DETAIL

DETAIL OF

COPY

FILE NAME

COPY_20041021_153050

CALL

DOCUMENT

STYLE:

2/2

1-SIDED

DATA SIZE: 21,987,543KB

3 ^{Touch the key of the desired file.}

SPECIAL

MODES:

OUTPUT:

FILE FORMAT:

If there are more keys

than can appear in one

screen and the desired

file does not appear,

JOBS COMPLETED

SET TIME

NUM

Tanaka7890123456 14:38 12/09 01

COPY

14:38 12/09 00

Suzuki7890123456 14:09 12/09 00

touch the

key to change

screens.

The touched key is highlighted.

key or

5 ^{Touch the [CALL] key.}

COPY

13:27 12/09 00

The operation selection

screen appears.

CALL

X JOB

INTERNET-FAX

Select and perform the desired operation as

explained in "Calling up and using a saved file"

(page 7-15).

7-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders

This section explains how to create, edit, and delete user names and custom folders for saving files with the

document filing function. User names and custom folders are created and edited at the operation panel of the

machine or in the Web page.

NOTES

ꢀ A previously stored name cannot be used when creating a new user name or custom folder. However, the same

password can be used more than once.

ꢀ A password cannot be omitted when creating a user name.

ꢁ General procedure for creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders

Follow steps 1 to 3 below to create, edit, or delete a user name or custom folder. In step 3, select the key for the

specific operation that you wish to perform.

Touch the key of the operation that you

wish to perform.

1 ^{Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.}

Go to the page indicated below for the selected

operation.

(1)

(2)

CUSTOM SETTINGS

DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL

USER NAME REGISTRATION

AMEND/DELETE USER NAME

Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL]

key.

AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

DEFAULT

SETTINGS

TOTAL COUNT

(3)

(4)

ADDRESS CONTROL

SENDER CONTROL

(1) [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key

Program a user name. (See the next page)

(2) [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME] key

Edit or delete a user name. (See page 7-23)

(3) [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key

Create a custom folder. (See page 7-24)

(4) [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER] key

Edit or delete a custom folder. (See page 7-25)

DOCUMENT FILING

CONTROL

KEY OPERATOR P

7-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

ꢁ Programming a user name

To program a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-21, touch the [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key in

step 3, and then follow these steps:

If you wish to specify a folder for the user

name, touch the [STORED TO:] key. If you

1 ^{Touch the [USER NAME] key.}

CUSTOM SETTINGS

wish to use the main folder, go to step 8.

The lowest number that

No.001

No.001 REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.

has not yet been

programmed appears

automatically in "No.".

Touch the number to

display a character entry

screen and enter a user

USER NAME

Yamada

USER NAME

PASSWORD

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE F

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE

MAIN FOLDER

STORED TO:

name (maximum of 16 characters). See page 7-26

for the procedure for entering characters.

The folders that have been created appear.

Touch the desired folder. If you wish to

create a new folder, or if no folders have

been created, touch the [ADD NEW] key.

2 ^{Touch the [INITIAL] key.}

A character entry screen

appears. Enter up to 10

STORED TO:

MAIN FOLDER

ADD NEW

search characters. See

INITIAL

page 7-26 for the

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

1/1

procedure for entering

characters.

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

R THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.

ALL FOLDERS

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRS

UVWXY

3 ^{Touch the [PASSWORD] key.}

If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a

name for the folder as explained on page 7-24.

CUSTOM

A password cannot be

No.001

omitted.

Yamada

USER NAME

The user name programmed in step 1 is selected

as the user name of the folder.

PASSWORD

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FIL

STORED TO:

8 ^{Touch the [EXIT] key.}

You will return to the

"USER

REGISTRATION"

screen.

"REGISTRATION

COMPLETED."

appear highlighted next

to "No.".

NAME

EXIT

Set a password for the user name (enter a

5-digit password with the numeric keys).

This will be the password

will

– – – – –

for the user name

CANCEL

entered in step 1.

As each digit is entered,

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

-" changes to " ". If

you make a mistake,

press the [C] key and

then enter the correct number.

To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To program

another user name, touch the [NEXT] key.

If you touched the [EXIT]

5 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

EXIT

key, you will return to the

screen of step 3 on page

7-21. If you touched the

[NEXT] key, a new user

entry screen will appear.

Repeat steps 1 to 9 to

program a new user.

Yamada

INITIAL

EXIT

WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.

CANCEL

10-KEY PAD.

7-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

ꢁ Editing and deleting a user name

To edit or delete a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-21 and then follow these steps:

Touch the [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME]

[Editing]

Touch the key of each item that you wish to

key.

edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 9 in

"Programming a user name" on page 7-

22).

AMEND/DELETE USER NAME

AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER

When you have finished

USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE

No.001

REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.

editing

"REGISTRATION

COMPLETED."

the

items,

Yamada

USER NAME

PASSWORD

INIT

will

Touch the [USER NAME] key that you wish

to edit or delete.

appear highlighted next

to "NO.".

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH

STORED TO:

MAIN FOLDER

EXIT

USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE

SELECT USER NAME TO AMEND/DELETE.

1/1

Suzuki

Sasaki

Nakata

When you have finished editing the

desired items, touch the [EXIT] key.

To edit another user

Hasegawa

Ono

Yamada

ALL USERS

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN

OPQRST UVWXYZ

DELETE

EXIT

name, repeat steps 2 to

A password entry screen will appear.

ITIAL

Yamada

To exit, touch the [EXIT]

key in the screen of step

Enter the 5-digit password with the

numeric keys.

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

NOTE

When a user name is changed, the change is not

updated to any previously saved data (files or

folders).

CANCEL

BCD

EFGHI

JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

After entering the password, the following screen

will appear.

[Deleting]

6 ^{Touch the [DELETE] key.}

DELETE

EXIT

USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE

No.001

Yamada

USER NAME

PASSWORD

INITIAL

Yamada

DELETE

EXIT

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.

STORED TO:

ITIAL

Yamada

MAIN FOLDER

ꢀTo edit a user name, perform steps 4 and 5.

ꢀTo delete a user name, perform steps 6 and 7.

7 ^{Touch the [YES] key.}

You will return to the

screen of step 2. To

delete another user

name, repeat steps 2, 3

and 6.

DELETE THE USER NAME?

Yamada

YES

To exit, touch the [EXIT]

key in the screen of step

7-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

ꢁ Creating a custom folder

Up to 500 custom folders can be created. When no further folders can be created, delete unneeded folders (page

7-25) and then create a new folder. A password can be omitted when creating a folder. To create a custom folder,

follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-21, touch the [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key in step 3, and then follow

the steps below.

1 ^{Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key.}

5 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

The lowest number that

No.001

has not yet been

programmed appears

automatically in "No.".

Touch the number to

display a character entry

EXIT

FOLDER NAME

CANCEL

INITIAL

USER NAME

10-KEY PAD.

screen and enter

folder name (maximum of 28 characters). See

page 7-26 for the procedure for entering

characters.

6 ^{Touch the [USER NAME] key.}

No.001

You will select a user

USER FOLDER 1

FOLDER NAME

name that will be

associated with the

folder name you are

programming.

2 ^{Touch the [INITIAL] key.}

USER1

PAS

INITIAL

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

A character entry screen

appears. Enter up to 10

search characters. See

page 7-26 for the

procedure for entering

characters.

USER NAME

No.001

USER FOLDER 1

FOLDER NAME

INITIAL

Selection of a user name

cannot be omitted.

USER NAME

The programmed user names appear.

Touch the desired user name. If you do not

wish to use any of the user names that

appear, touch the [ADD NEW] key to

program a new user name.

If you wish to set a password for the new

folder, touch the [PASSWORD] key.

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

No.001

password can be

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

SELECT USER NAME.

Suzuki

omitted.

If you are omitting a

password, go to step 6.

USER FOLDER 1

FOLDER NAME

INITIAL

1/1

Sasaki

Nakata

Yamada

PASSWORD

Hasegawa

Ono

USER NAME

ADD NEW

ALL FOLDERS

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

When you touch a user name, a password entry

screen appears.

Set a password for the folder (enter a 5-

digit password with the numeric keys).

This will be the password

If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a

user name as explained on page 7-22. The folder

name programmed in step 1 will be selected as the

folder for the user.

for the folder name

CANCEL

entered in step 1.

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

Enter the 5-digit password of the selected

user name with the numeric keys.

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

BCD

EFGHI

JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

7-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CUSTOM SETTINGS

To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To create

another folder, touch the [NEXT] key.

If you touched the [EXIT]

9 ^{Touch the [OK] key.}

key, you will return to the

EXIT

screen of step 3 on page

7-21. If you touched the

[NEXT] key, a new folder

1/1

ADD NEW

screen

will

appear.

SWORD

Repeat steps 1 to 10 to

create a new folder.

ꢁ Editing/deleting a custom folder

To edit a previously created folder (change the folder name, initial, password, or user name), or to delete a folder,

follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-21 and then follow the steps below.

When deleting a folder...

A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the folder.

: [MOVE] (see page 7-19)

: [DELETE] (see page 7-19)

Touch the [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM

FOLDER] key.

[Editing]

Touch the key of each item that you wish to

edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 10 of

"Creating a custom folder" on page 7-24).

AMEND/DELETE USER NAME

DELETE

EXIT

CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE

AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER

No.001

REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.

USER FOLDER 1

FOLDER NAME

USER1

INITIAL

PASSWORD

Yamada

USER NAME

Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key that you

wish to edit or delete.

After editing the items and returning to the screen of

step 3, "REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will be

highlighted to the right of "No.".

EXIT

CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE

SELECT CUSTOM FOLDER TO AMEND/DELETE.

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

1/2

To stop using

password, touch the

[PASSWORD] key and then touch the [OK] key

without entering anything for the password. [-] will

appear and the password will be cancelled.

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

ALL FOLDERS

ABCD

EFGHI

JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

When you have finished editing the items,

touch the [EXIT] key.

To edit another folder, repeat steps 2 to 5.

If a password has been set for the folder, a

password entry screen will appear. Enter the

correct 5-digit password with the numeric keys.

[Deleting]

6 ^{Touch the [DELETE] key.}

3 ^{Edit or delete the folder.}

DELETE

EXIT

CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE

No.001

EXIT

DELETE

USER FOLDER 1

FOLDER NAME

USER1

*****

INITIAL

PASSWORD

– – – – –

ORD

Yamada

USER NAME

7 ^{Touch the [YES] key.}

ꢀTo edit the folder, perform steps 4 and 5.

ꢀTo delete the folder, perform steps 6 and 7.

ꢀTo exit, touch the [EXIT] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 2.

DELETE THE FOLDER?

To delete another folder,

repeat steps 2, 6, and 7.

To exit, touch the [EXIT]

key in the screen of step

USER FOLDER 1

YES

7-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

To enter or edit characters in setting screens such as auto dial key programming screens, follow the steps below.

Characters that can be entered are alphabetical characters, special characters, numbers, and symbols.

ꢁ Entering alphabetical characters

(Example: Olivetti äÄ)

1 ^{Touch the [S] key.}

5 ^{Touch the [ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key.}

Characters cannot be

entered beyond the " " mark.

Olivetti

6 ^{Touch the [ä] key.}

To switch between upper case and lower case,

touch the [ABC abc] key. When ABC is

Olivetti

highlighted, upper case letters are entered.

abc] key.

2 ^{Touch the [ABC}

To switch between upper case and lower case,

touch the [ÃÄÂ

ãäâ] key. When ãäâ is

highlighted, lower case letters are entered.

ãäâ] key.

7 ^{Touch the [ÃÄÂ}

Olivetti ä

Touch the [h] key, [a] key, [r] key, and [p]

key.

Shar

8 ^{Touch the [Ä] key.}

Olivetti ä

If you make a mistake, touch the

key to move

the cursor ( ) back one space and then enter the

correct character. You can also press the [AB/ab

12#$%] key during entry to enter a number or

symbol.

You can press the [ABC/abc] key during entry to

return to alphabetical character entry. You can

also enter numbers and symbols.

4 ^{Touch the [SPACE] key.}

9 ^{When finished, touch the [OK] key.}

Olivetti

Olivetti äÄ

The cursor ( ) moves forward and a space is

entered.

You will exit the character entry screen and return

to the programming screen. If you touch the

[CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming

screen without storing the entered characters.

7-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENTERING CHARACTERS

ꢁ Entering numbers and symbols

1 ^{Touch the [AB/ab}

12#$%] key.

When you have finished entering

characters, touch the [OK] key.

1&1

When the characters "12#$%" are highlighted,

number/symbol entry mode is selected.

You will exit the character entry screen and return

to the programming screen. If you touch the

[CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming

screen without storing the entered characters.

2 ^{Enter the desired number or symbol.}

Numbers and symbols that can be entered are as

follows:

NOTE

Screen 1/2

The following symbols cannot be used when

entering a file name or folder name.

:::

;

Screen 2/2

* Change screens by touching the

key displayed in the screen. If you make a

mistake, touch the key to move the cursor

key or

( ) back one space and then enter the correct

character.

You can continue touching keys to enter

characters. You can also touch another

character type selection key ([ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key

or [AB/ab

12#$%] key) to enter characters

other than numbers and symbols.

7-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING

This section explains problems frequently encountered when using the document filing function. If you experience

any difficulty, refer to the following table. For information on general machine problems, printer problems, fax

problems, and network scanner problems, please see the troubleshooting sections of the appropriate manuals.

Problem

A saved file has Was the file called up and then printed by A file that is printed using the [PRINT AND

disappeared. touching the [PRINT AND DELETE THE DELETE THE DATA] key is automatically

Check

Cause and solution

DATA] key?

deleted after being printed. To print a file

without deleting it, use the [PRINT AND

SAVE THE DATA] key.

A file cannot be Is the file's attribute set to [PROTECT]?

deleted.

A file cannot be deleted when its attribute is

set to [PROTECT]. Change the attribute to

[SHARING] and then delete the file.

file's attribute Is the file in the main or custom folder?

A file in the Quick File folder cannot be set to

[CONFIDENTIAL]. Move the file to a

different folder or set it to [PROTECT].

cannot be set to

[CONFIDENTIAL].

file's attribute Is the file set to [CONFIDENTIAL]?

A file cannot be simultaneously set to

[CONFIDENTIAL] and [PROTECT]. If set to

cannot be changed

to [PROTECT].

[CONFIDENTIAL],

use

[PROPERTY

CHANGE] (page 7-18) to change the

attribute to [PROTECT].

A name in the Quick Was the name programmed in the advanced If the name was programmed in the

File folder is cut off. transmission settings?

advanced transmission settings before the

file was saved in the Quick File folder, that

name will be used. However, if the name is

longer than the maximum name length of the

Quick File folder (30 characters), the excess

characters will be discarded.

Resolution settings Was the file saved at low resolution?

are not possible.

A saved file cannot be transmitted at a

resolution higher than the resolution at

which it was saved.

A file name cannot Have you entered prohibited characters in Certain characters (symbols) cannot be

be programmed or the file name?

changed.

used in file names. See "ENTERING

CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and

symbols) on page 7-26.

custom folder Have you entered prohibited characters in Certain characters (symbols) cannot be

name cannot be the folder name?

used in folder names. See "ENTERING

CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and

symbols) on page 7-26.

programmed

changed.

The printing speed The file was saved using one of the following When a file is saved using one of the

of a saved file is resolution settings:

resolutions setting at left, the printing speed

will be slower than when other resolution

settings are used.

ꢀ

slow.

200 x 200 dpi resolution.

ꢀ

STANDARD (200 x 100 dpi) or FINE (200

x 200 dpi)

Black dots appear Was the file saved at other than the following This problem can be alleviated by setting the

when a file that was resolutions?

resolution to 600x600dpi when saving a file

with scan save.

ꢀ

saved

with

the

600 x 600 dpi

ꢀ

document

function is printed.

filing

The problem can be further alleviated by

selecting HALF TONE after setting the

resolution to 600x600dpi, as light images

will be printed lightly.

600 x 600 dpi and HALF TONE

To check the resolution of the saved file, touch

the [DETAIL] key in step 5 on page 7-16.

7-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER 8

SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter contains useful information about the machine.

Page

SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................. 8-2

LIST OF COMBINATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES.......................... 8-4

INDEX..................................................................................................... 8-5

8-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

Type

Console

Print system

Photoconductive type

Developer system

Fusing system

Resolution

Electrophotographic system

OPC drum

Dry-type two-component magnetic brush development

Heater roller

Scan: 600 x 600 dpi, output: 600 x 600 dpi

256 levels

Gradation

Originals

Sheets, bound documents

Maximum size: A3 or 11" x 17"

Copy paper

Copy sizes

Plain paper and special papers

Max. A3 or 11" x 17", min. A5R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, Postcard

Image loss: Max 8 mm or 21/64" (leading edge and trailing edge in total),

max. 8 mm or 21/64" (along all other edges in total)

Warm-up time

First-copy time

80 seconds or less

4.9 seconds or less*

* Conditions: The document glass is used and A4 size paper is fed horizontally from

the machine tray (tray 1).

Copy ratio

Variable: 25 to 400% in 1% increments, total 376 steps

Fixed presets: 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%

and 400% for AB system, 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200% and

400% for inch system.

Continuous copy

Dimensions

999 copies

826 mm (W) x 665 mm (D) x 1127 mm (H)

(32-33/64" (W) x 26-11/64" (D) x 44-23/64" (H))

(including automatic

document feeder)

Weight

Approx. 100 kg (Approx. 220.5 lbs.)

Overall dimensions

(When tray is extended)

963 mm (W) x 665 mm (D) (37-29/32" (W) x 26-11/64"(D))

Required power supply

For power supply requirements, see the name plate located on the back of the

main unit.

Operating conditions

Temperature: 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)

Humidity: 20% to 85%

Automatic document feeder

Name

B/W scanner module/DSPF

Original size

A3 to A5 (11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2")

Weight of originals

Number of originals

50 to 128 g/m (14 to 34 lbs.)

Maximum 50 sheets (maximum 30 A3 or B4 (11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14") size

sheets*), stack height must not exceed the heights indicated below.

50 to 80 g/m (14 to 21 lbs.): 6.5 mm (17/64") or less

80 to 128 g/m (21 to 34 lbs.): 5 mm (13/64") or less

Power supply

Dimensions

Weight

Supplied from machine

824 mm (W) x 606 mm (D) x 190 mm (H) (32-7/16" (W) x 23-55/64" (D) x 7-31/64" (H))

Approx. 21.0 k (46.3 lbs.)

Maximum of 15 sheets when originals are heavier than 105 g/m (28 lbs.). If the number of placed sheets exceeds

this, scanning of the originals will not take place correctly and an extended image may result.

Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.

8-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

Continuous copying speed (when the offset function is not used)

Olivetti d-Copia 3501 / 3501 MFOlivetti d-Copia 4501 / 4501 MF

100% / Reduced / Enlarged

Copy paper size

A3 (11" x 17")

17 copies/min.

20 copies/min.

35 copies/min.

25 copies/min.

35 copies/min.

25 copies/min.

35 copies/min.

B4 (8-1/2" x 14")

A4 (8-1/2" x 11")

A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)

B5 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2")

B5R (7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R)

A5R (8-1/2" x 5-1/2"R)

Centre tray specifications

Output method

Face-down output

Maximum number

of sheets

(80g/m

(20lbs.) 400 sheets*

/recommended

paper)

Paper type

Plain paper and special paper

* The maximum number of pages that can be held varies

depending on ambient conditions in the installation

location, the type of paper, and the storage conditions of

the paper.

Acoustic Noise Emission (measurement according to ISO7779)

Sound power level ^LwA

Printing mode

6.8B or less

Standby mode

5.0B or less

Emission Concentration (measurement according to RAL-UZ85: Edition Mar. 2002)

Ozone

Dust

0.02 mg/m or less

0.075 mg/m or less

Styrene

0.07 mg/m or less

8-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LIST OF COMBINATION OF

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

The table below shows the possible system configurations. Some devices require the installation of others (B) to be

functional and some cannot be installed together (A).

(B)

Related to paper feed unit

Multi purpose drawer

Stand/3 x 500 sheet

paper drawer

Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet

paper drawer

Duplex module/bypass tray

Duplex module

(A)

Output units

Saddle stitch finisher

Finisher

Mail-bin stacker

Exit tray

Upper exit tray extension

Punch unit

= ( ) and ( ) must be installed together.

¹= ( ) requires installation of one of the ( ) units.

= Cannot be installed together.

8-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

[

] key................................................................. 1-13

Calling up and using a saved file.......................... 7-15

-Delete............................................................... 7-19

-Detail................................................................ 7-19

-Move ................................................................ 7-19

-Print.................................................................. 7-16

-Property change .............................................. 7-18

-Send................................................................. 7-17

Card shot.......................................1-6, 5-2, 5-26, 7-12

Cartridge lock lever .............................................. 1-10

Centre erase........................................................... 5-4

Centre tray.......................................................1-9, 4-9

[CENTRE TRAY] key............................................ 3-18

Changing the paper size in paper tray ................... 2-2

Charger cleaner ..................................................... 6-2

Clear all key...................................................1-13, 7-4

Clear key .......................................................1-13, 7-4

Clock .................................................................... 2-12

Confidential ............................................................ 7-3

Contents.......................................................0-5 to 0-6

Continuous copying speed..................................... 8-3

[COPY] key........................................................... 1-13

Covers/inserts ........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-11

Creating a custom folder ...................................... 7-24

Custom folder...........................7-3, 7-21, 7-24 to 7-25

Custom settings ..........................................2-12, 7-21

[CUSTOM SETTINGS] key ...........................1-13, 7-4

[#/P] key ............................................................... 1-13

■ Numerics

1-sided copy

-Automatic document feeder ............................... 4-7

-Document glass ............................................... 4-11

2in1 ............................................................. 5-23, 7-12

2-sided copy.........................................1-3, 4-10, 4-13

■ A

ACC.#-C............................................................... 1-13

[ACC.#-C] key.............................................. 1-13, 1-18

Acceptable originals............................................... 4-2

Account number................................................... 1-18

Additional fax memory.......................................... 1-12

Address control .................................................... 2-12

Adjusting the exposure.................................. 1-3, 4-14

All custom setting list............................................ 2-14

Applicable plain paper............................................ 2-4

Applicable special media........................................ 2-4

Attributes................................................................ 7-3

Auditing mode ...................................................... 1-18

Auto image ........................................................... 4-15

Auto power shut-off mode ...................................... 1-8

Automatic copy image rotation............................... 4-4

Automatic document feeder ...................1-9, 2-22, 4-2

-1-sided copies.................................................... 4-7

-Acceptable originals........................................... 4-2

-Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-10

-Misfeed original................................................ 2-22

-Setting originals ................................................. 4-3

-User maintenance.............................................. 6-2

Automatic exposure adjustment........................... 4-14

Automatic selection .............................................. 4-15

Automatic two-sided copying

■ D

Data security kit.................................................... 1-12

Date print..............................................1-6, 5-29, 5-32

Default settings..................................................... 2-14

[DETAIL] key......................................................... 1-16

Display contrast.................................................... 2-14

Display switching keys.......................................... 1-16

Disposal of hole punch scrap ............................... 3-21

Document feeder tray......................................4-2, 4-3

Document filing control......................................... 2-12

Document filing function..................................1-8, 7-1

Document filing user / folder list ........................... 2-14

[DOCUMENT FILING] key ............................1-13, 7-4

Document glass

-Automatic document feeder ............................. 4-10

-Document glass ............................................... 4-13

Automatic two-sided printing .................................. 2-4

■ B

-1-sided copies.................................................. 4-11

-Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-13

-Placing originals................................................. 4-3

-User maintenance.............................................. 6-2

Dual page copy ........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-5

DUAL PAGE SCAN .............................................. 7-12

Duplex module ..............................1-9, 1-11, 2-19, 3-2

Duplex module/bypass tray ...........................1-11, 3-2

Duplex module side cover .................................... 1-10

B/W reverse............................................1-6, 5-2, 5-28

Barcode font kit .................................................... 1-12

Binding change ........................................... 4-10, 4-13

Book copy ..............................................1-5, 5-2, 5-25

Book original .......................................................... 5-5

Bypass tray....................................1-9, 2-19, 3-2, 4-20

Bypass tray extension ............................................ 3-3

■ C

[C] key ........................................................... 1-13, 7-4

[CA] key......................................................... 1-13, 7-4

Call for service ..................................................... 2-23

[CALL] key............................................................ 1-16

Calling up and using a file.................................... 7-13

■ E

Editing and deleting

-Custom folder................................................... 7-25

-User names...................................................... 7-23

[E-MAIL/FTP] key................................................. 1-16

Energy saving features........................................... 1-8

Energy Star guidelines ........................................... 1-8

Enlargement......................................................... 4-15

Entering characters..................................7-26 to 7-27

8-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

Erase...............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-4, 7-12

Examples of covers and inserts ............... 5-16 to 5-21

-Covers.................................................. 5-17 to 5-20

-Inserts.............................................................. 5-21

Exit tray ..................................................1-9, 1-11, 3-2

Loading paper ........................................................ 2-2

-Bypass tray ........................................................ 3-3

-Multi purpose drawer ......................................... 2-8

-Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer................... 2-10

-Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer .......... 2-11

-Tray 1 ................................................................. 2-2

Lower cover............................................................ 3-2

■ F

Facsimile expansion kit ........................................ 1-12

Fax data receival/forward ..................................... 2-12

[FAX JOB] key...................................................... 1-16

Features................................................................. 1-3

[FILE FOLDER] key................................................ 7-5

Finisher ......................................................... 1-11, 3-7

Finisher compiler.................................................. 3-11

Flash ROM kit ...................................................... 1-12

Front cover .............................................1-9, 3-5, 3-14

Fusing unit..........................................1-10, 2-17, 2-18

Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers..................... 2-9

■ M

Mail bins................................................................. 3-5

Mail-bin stacker .............................................1-11, 3-5

Main charger .......................................................... 6-2

Main features................................................1-3 to 1-8

Main folder.............................................................. 7-3

Main screen............................................................ 5-2

Manual exposure adjustment ............................... 4-14

Manual selection .................................................. 4-16

Margin shift...............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-3

Meaning of "R" ....................................................... 1-2

Mirror image ...........................................1-6, 5-2, 5-28

Misfeed............... 2-17 to 2-22, 3-6, 3-12, 3-22 to 3-23

Misfeed in the paper feed area.................2-20 to 2-21

Misfeed original .................................................... 2-22

Misfeed removal ................................................... 2-17

-Automatic document feeder ............................. 2-22

-Bypass tray ...................................................... 2-19

-Duplex module ................................................. 2-19

-Finisher ............................................................ 3-12

-Saddle stitch finisher........................................ 3-22

-Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer................... 2-21

-Transport area, fusing area, and exit area ....... 2-18

-Tray 1 ............................................................... 2-20

Mode select key ................................................... 1-15

Mode select keys...........................................1-13, 7-4

Multi purpose drawer.......................1-9, 1-11, 2-3, 2-8

Multi shot................................................1-5, 5-2, 5-23

■ G

General procedure for using special functions....... 5-2

Greyed out............................................................ 1-14

Group ..............................................1-3, 3-8, 3-18, 4-9

[GROUP] key................................................. 3-9, 3-18

■ H

[HDD STATUS] key................................................. 7-5

Heavy paper.................................................... 2-3, 2-4

Highlighted ........................................................... 1-14

Hole punching ............................................... 1-8, 3-17

■ I

Icon ......................................................1-14, 5-16, 7-5

[IMAGE SEND] key .............................................. 1-13

Information ........................................................... 2-17

Installation requirements........................................ 0-2

Interior.................................................................. 1-10

[INTERNET-FAX] key ........................................... 1-16

Interrupting a copy run .................................. 1-7, 5-43

■ N

Network scanner expansion kit ............................ 1-12

Non-standard sizes ...........................2-3, 2-5, 2-6, 4-5

Number of pages printed...................................... 1-18

number of pages transmitted (scanned)............... 1-18

Numeric keys.................................................1-13, 7-4

■ J

Job build..........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-8, 7-12

Job programs ....................................1-6, 5-41 to 5-42

-Calling up......................................................... 5-42

-Deleting............................................................ 5-42

-Storing ............................................................. 5-41

Job status screen................................................. 1-15

[JOB STATUS] key ............................................... 1-13

■ O

Offset......................................................1-7, 3-8, 3-15

[OFFSET] key................................................ 3-9, 3-18

Offset tray......................................................3-7, 3-14

Operation panel.............................................1-9, 1-13

-Document filing function..................................... 7-4

Original guides ....................................................... 4-3

Original orientation........................................3-16, 4-4

Original size .............................................4-2, 4-5, 4-6

Output .......................... 3-8, 3-9, 3-16, 3-18, 4-9, 4-12

Output tray.............................................................. 4-9

■ K

Key operator programs......................................... 2-12

Keyboard select.................................................... 2-14

■ L

Labels..................................................................... 2-3

Landscape.............................................................. 1-2

Latch ...................................................................... 3-7

List print................................................................ 2-14

8-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

[SADDLE STITCH] key ........................................ 3-18

Saving a document image file ....................7-6 to 7-12

-Filing ........................................................7-7 to 7-8

-Print jobs............................................................ 7-9

-Quick file ............................................................ 7-6

-Scan save ............................................7-10 to 7-11

[SCAN TO HDD] key .............................................. 7-5

[SEARCH] key........................................................ 7-5

Searching for a file ...................................7-13 to 7-14

Selecting a function.............................................. 1-14

Selecting the exposure level................................. 4-14

Selecting the exposure mode............................... 4-14

Selecting the output tray......................................... 4-9

Sender control...................................................... 2-12

Sender control list ................................................ 2-14

Sending address list............................................. 2-14

Setting the paper size...................................2-5 to 2-6

Setting the paper type ..................................2-5 to 2-7

Sharing................................................................... 7-3

Side cover latch.................................................... 1-10

Sort..................................................1-3, 3-8, 3-15, 4-9

[SORT] key....................................................3-9, 3-18

Special modes (Copier operation).......................... 5-2

Special modes (Document filing function)............ 7-12

Special paper ...............................................2-3 to 2-4

Special papers ..................................................... 4-20

Specifications...............................................8-2 to 8-3

-Duplex module ................................................... 3-2

-Finisher .............................................................. 3-7

-Mail-bin stacker.................................................. 3-5

-Punch module.................................................. 3-15

-Sadlle stitch finisher......................................... 3-14

-Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer................... 2-10

-Stand/MPD x 2000 sheet paper drawer........... 2-11

Specifications of paper trays .................................. 2-3

Stamp...................................................1-6, 5-29, 5-33

Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer 1-9, 1-11, 2-3, 2-10

Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer.1-9, 1-11, 2-3, 2-11

Standard sizes.................................................1-2, 2-4

Standard sizes in both the inch and AB systems ... 1-2

Staple box .............................................................. 3-7

Staple cartridge...........................................3-10, 3-14

Staple cartridge replacement ......................3-10, 3-19

Staple jam removal..........................3-11, 3-20 to 3-21

Staple sort..............................................1-7, 3-8, 3-16

[STAPLE SORT] key......................................3-9, 3-18

Stapler compiler ................................................... 3-14

Stapler section ..................................................... 3-14

Stapling positions..........................................3-8, 3-16

[START] key.......................................................... 1-13

[STOP/DELETE] key ............................................ 1-16

Storage of supplies............................................... 2-16

■ P

Page numbering.......................1-7, 5-29, 5-34 to 5-37

Pamphlet copy..........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-6

Paper curled......................................................... 2-24

Paper tray...................................................... 1-9, 2-20

Paper tray settings ........................................ 2-5, 2-14

Part names

-Duplex module................................................... 3-2

-Exterior .............................................................. 1-9

-Finisher .............................................................. 3-7

-Interior.............................................................. 1-10

-Mail-bin stacker.................................................. 3-5

-Operation panel ........................................ 1-13, 7-4

-Peripheral devices............................................ 1-11

-Saddle stitich finisher....................................... 3-14

Password................................................................ 7-8

Peripheral devices....................................... 1-11, 1-12

Photo.................................................................... 4-14

Photoconductive drum .................................. 1-10, 6-2

Placing originals..................................................... 4-3

Plain paper................................................... 2-3 to 2-4

Portrait.................................................................... 1-2

Postcards ............................................................... 2-8

Power .......................................................... 1-17, 2-23

Power switch ................................................. 1-9, 1-17

Preheat mode......................................................... 1-8

Preset copy ratios................................................. 4-16

[PRINT JOB] key.................................................. 1-16

Print menu................................................ 5-29 to 5-40

-Date ................................................................. 5-32

-Stamp............................................................... 5-33

-Page numbering............................................... 5-34

-Text .................................................................. 5-38

PRINT mode indicators........................................ 1-13

Printer condition ................................................... 2-12

Printer server card................................................ 1-12

Printer test page................................................... 2-14

[PRIORITY] key.................................................... 1-16

Proper storage ..................................................... 2-16

Protect.................................................................... 7-3

PS3 expansion kit ................................................ 1-11

Punch module ...................................................... 3-15

[PUNCH] key........................................................ 3-18

■ Q

Quick File folder ..................................................... 7-3

[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key ................................... 7-5

[READ-END] key.................................................. 4-12

■ R

Reduction............................................................. 4-15

Reduction/Enlargement................................. 1-4, 4-15

Replacing the toner cartridges............................. 2-15

Right output tray................................................... 1-11

Rotation copying .................................................... 4-4

■ T

Tandem copy............................................1-5, 5-2, 5-9

Text..............................................1-7, 4-14, 5-29, 5-38

Text/photo............................................................. 4-14

The machine does not operate......................2-23, 6-3

Toner cartridge ............................................1-10, 2-15

Top cover................................................3-5, 3-7, 3-14

■ S

Saddle stitch.........................................1-7, 3-14, 3-17

Saddle stitch finisher................................... 1-11, 3-14

Saddle stitch tray.................................................. 3-14

8-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

Top tray............................................................ 3-5, 3-7

Total count............................................................ 2-14

Total number of originals........................................ 4-2

Touch panel...................................1-13, 1-14, 7-4, 7-5

Transparency film....... 2-3, 2-4, 2-10, 2-16, 4-20, 5-22

Transparency inserts..............................1-5, 5-2, 5-22

Tray......................................................................... 1-9

Troubleshooting

-Copier operation ................................................ 6-3

-Document filing function................................... 7-28

-Duplex module................................................... 3-4

-Finisher ............................................................ 3-13

-General information ............................. 2-23 to 2-25

-Saddle stitch finisher........................................ 3-24

Types and sizes of paper ............................. 2-3 to 2-4

Types and sizes of paper that can be used............ 2-3

■ U

Upper exit tray extension............................... 1-9, 1-11

Upper paper output area........................................ 1-9

User maintenance.................................................. 6-2

User name................................................ 7-21 to 7-23

■ W

Warming up.......................................................... 2-23

■ X

XY Zoom ....................................................... 1-4, 4-18

■ Z

Zoom.................................................................... 4-16

8-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This equipment complies with the requirements of Directives 89/336/EEC and 73/23/EEC

as amended by 93/68/EEC.

Dieses Gerät entspricht den Anforderungen der EG-Richtlinien 89/336/EWG und

73/23/EWG mit Änderung 93/68/EWG.

Ce matériel répond aux exigences contenues dans les directives 89/336/CEE et 73/23/CEE

modifiées par la directive 93/68/CEE.

Dit apparaat voldoet aan de eisen van de richtlijnen 89/336/EEG en 73/23/EEG, gewijzigd

door 93/68/EEG.

Dette udstyr overholder kravene i direktiv nr. 89/336/EEC og 73/23/EEC med tillæg nr.

93/68/EEC.

Quest’ apparecchio è conforme ai requisiti delle direttive 89/336/EEC e 73/23/EEC, come

emendata dalla direttiva 93/68/EEC.

Este equipamento obedece às exigências das directivas 89/336/CEE e 73/23/CEE, na sua

versão corrigida pela directiva 93/68/CEE.

Este aparato satisface las exigencias de las Directivas 89/336/CEE y 73/23/CEE,

modificadas por medio de la 93/68/CEE.

Denna utrustning uppfyller kraven enligt riktlinjerna 89/336/EEC och 73/23/EEC så som

kompletteras av 93/68/EEC.

Dette produktet oppfyller betingelsene i direktivene 89/336/EEC og 73/23/EEC i endringen

93/68/EEC.

Tämä laite täyttää direktiivien 89/336/EEC ja 73/23/EEC vaatimukset, joita on muutettu

direktiivillä 93/68/EEC.

The CE mark logo label is affixed on an equipment in case that the directives described in the above

sentence are applicable to the product. (This sentence is not applicable in any country where the

above directives are not required.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

525008EN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Miele Washer w864 User Manual
Multiquip Portable Generator DCA 56SPX User Manual
NEC Projector VT695 700 User Manual
NETGEAR Network Router D500 User Manual
NuTone Fan PFLK 123 User Manual
Oki Printer Accessories 42625501 User Manual
Optimus Clock Radio 12 1610 User Manual
Palsonic CRT Television 9219SF User Manual
Panasonic Telephone KXTG4744B User Manual
Panasonic VCR AJ DCP User Manual